JP2021112406A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of changing a putout ratio by a player's skill.SOLUTION: When a bell small winning combination for left-eye pressing is won internally and a stop switch is pressed inversely in a normal game state in which all the reels are being rotated, main control means stops a lower tile pattern on an effective line and displays a bell pattern in a lower stage since operation timing is a position of zero-frame sliding although first stop operation is in incorrect pressing order. When a stop switch is operated in second stop operation, a cherry pattern with the center is stopped on the effective line and a bell pattern is displayed in the lower stage. When a stop switch is operated in third stop operation, a watermelon pattern is stopped on the effective line, a bell pattern is displayed in the lower stage, and FRU is allowed to win. More specifically, when first stop operation is in incorrect pressing order (middle first or right first), and operation timing is an exact position in first stop, FRU as a strong bell winning combination is always allowed to win.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine system that manages the history of games played by a player using an external processing means, and the gaming machine itself in the system. In particular, the present invention relates to a notification function of a set value (or also referred to as a “step set value”) of a gaming machine played by a player in a game history, and a stop control function based on the set value.

Conventionally, a gaming machine installed in a game store is provided with a device for showing the past history of the gaming machine in order to facilitate a player's decision to select a gaming machine to play a game. It was provided in the vicinity of, so that a so-called slump graph or the like was displayed.

Further, it is not preferable to equip the conventional gaming machine with a storage medium that can be directly operated and managed by the player from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts. For this reason, it was not possible to distribute or manage the game history for each player. Under the circumstances, it was impossible for the player to notify the true set value (or step set value) of the gaming machine played by the player (see Patent Documents 1 to 4).

JP 2002-000808 JP 2011-218195 JP 2016-039939 JP 2013-144147

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the output rate according to the skill of the player.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of customizing the effect performed in association with a game performed by the gaming machine according to the intention of the player. In particular, the present invention relates to a function of notifying a set value (or a step set value) of a gaming machine actually played by a player in a game history. It should be noted that Patent Documents 1 to 4 are technical materials published by the Japan Patent Office for the purpose of protecting the invention, and these technical materials are not copyrighted and should be referred to as publicly known technologies. Then, the invention of the present application will be described. That is, it is a major premise that all of these publicly known technical documents and accompanying drawings are copyright-free, and are acceptable.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention according to claim 1 has a plurality of rotating cylinders in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on an outer peripheral surface, and a lottery for a winning combination for each game. Taking the opportunity of the role lottery means for determining the success or failure and the reception of the operation of the stop switch provided corresponding to each of the rotating cylinders by rotating a plurality of rotating cylinders for each game, the corresponding rotating cylinders are individually selected. It is provided with a symbol display control means for stopping the game and displaying the symbol in a mode corresponding to the determined combination, and among the combinations determined by the combination lottery means, there are a plurality of combinations for pressing. The winning combination is the first ball output rate when at least the first combination and the second combination are won at the same time and the first combination is won, and when the second combination is won. The second ball ejection rate is set so that the second ball ejection rate is higher than the first ball ejection rate. The correct answer operation order for winning a winning combination is defined, and when the winning combination lottery means determines any one of the winning combinations, when the stop switch is operated in the correct answer operation order, the symbol The display control means stops the corresponding rotating drum so as to win the second combination, the combination lottery means determines any one of the winning combinations, and the stop switch determines the correct operation order. When the operation is performed in a different order from the above, the symbol display control means corresponds to the second winning combination when the first operation timing of the stop switch is deviated by a predetermined number of frames or less. While stopping the body, when the first operation timing of the stop switch exceeds a predetermined number of frames, the corresponding rotating body is stopped so as to win the first combination.

The gaming machine of the present invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the deviation of the predetermined number of frames is 0 frames.

The gaming machine of the present invention according to claim 3 includes a plurality of rotating cylinders in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on an outer peripheral surface, a winning combination lottery means for determining the winning or losing of a winning combination by drawing a winning combination for each game. A plurality of rotating cylinders are rotated for each game, and when the operation of the stop switch provided corresponding to each rotating cylinder is received, the corresponding rotating cylinders are individually stopped to play a determined role. A symbol display control means for displaying a symbol in a corresponding manner is provided, and among the combinations determined by the combination lottery means, there are a plurality of eye-pressing combinations, and the eye-pressing combination is at least. The first ball output rate when the first combination and the second combination are won at the same time and the first combination wins, and the second ball output rate when the second combination wins, The second ball ejection rate is set to be higher than the first ball ejection rate, and the correct answer operation order for winning the second winning combination for the plurality of eye-pressing combinations is set. Is defined, and when the combination lottery means determines any one of the winning combinations, when the stop switch is operated in the correct operation order, the symbol display control means is the second. When the corresponding spinning drum is stopped so as to win a winning combination, the winning combination lottery means determines any one of the winning combinations, and the stop switch is operated in an order different from the correct operation order. When the first operation timing of the stop switch is the position of the bitter, the symbol display control means stops the corresponding rotating cylinder so as to win the second combination, while the first stop switch of the stop switch. When the operation timing is not the position of the bitter, the corresponding rotating cylinder is stopped so as to win the first winning combination.

According to the present invention, the same winning combination can be changed to a normal bell or a strong bell (normal replay or strong replay) due to a difference in the player's eye-pressing technique (difference in skill). It is possible to change the output rate by drawing lots or shifting to a special game in which the assist function is activated.

Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to know that the true set value of the gaming machine is either an odd number value or an even number value. Further, since the pull-in range of the push symbol changes, it becomes possible to know that the true set value of the gaming machine is either an odd number value or an even number value.

Further, according to the present invention, it is possible to customize the effect performed in association with the game performed by the gaming machine according to the intention of the player. Further, in the history of the game, it becomes possible to know the true set value (or the actual set value) of the gaming machine actually played by the player.

It is the schematic which shows the whole structure of the gaming machine system 1000 including the gaming machine which concerns on this invention. It is the schematic which shows the hardware structure of the mobile phone 2100. It is the schematic which shows the hardware composition of the gaming machine server 3100. It is a front view which shows the front surface of the slot machine 1010 which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the slot machine 1010. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol attached to each of three reels 1030L-1030R. It is a functional block diagram which shows the outline of the main function in a slot machine 1010. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the number | placement corresponding to a plurality of game states and a type of a combination. It is a figure which shows the example (a) which shows the concept of a lottery table, and the example (b) of a winning flag. It is a flowchart of control in the main control means 1100. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the combination lottery processing which is called and executed in step S1005 of the subroutine of FIG. It is a subroutine flowchart of the reel stop control processing which is called and executed in step S1011 of the subroutine of FIG. It is a subroutine flowchart of the reel stop control processing which is called and executed in step S1012 of the subroutine of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine in which the continuation processing of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the process which is executed when a player operates a settlement button 1054. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the subroutine for processing the information received from the main control means 1100 in the sub control means 1200. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the member registration process. The flowchart shown in FIG. 17 shows the processes executed by the slot machine 1010, the mobile phone 2100, and the gaming machine server 3100, the correspondence between these processes, and transmission or reception between these devices. It is a flowchart which shows the outline with the information. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process for storing the game-related information about the game played in the slot machine 1010 in the game machine server 3100 when the player plays a game in the slot machine 1010. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the process for customizing the effect performed with the game performed by the slot machine 1010, and is the process executed by each of the slot machine 1010, the mobile phone 2100, and the game machine server 3100, and It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the correspondence relationship of these processes, and the information transmitted or received between these devices. It is a flowchart which shows the process for selective production of the process executed by the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a process for inputting a password executed by the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. This is a QR code / password generation process executed by the sub-control means 1200, and is a subroutine called and executed in step S2012 of FIG. 20 described above. It is a flowchart which shows the process for adding the value of achievement state information executed by the sub-control means 1200 of a slot machine 1010. The mission-addition value correspondence table of the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 is conceptually stored in the storage means 1290 and defines the relationship between various missions and the addition value corresponding to each of them. It is a table shown in. It is a flowchart which shows the process for adding the value of the achievement state information executed by the game machine server 3100. It is a table conceptually showing a mission-addition value correspondence table stored in the management database server 3178 of the game machine server 3100 and defining the relationship between various missions and the addition value corresponding to each of them. It is a flowchart which shows the process related to the password executed by the gaming machine server 3100. This is a subroutine for processing the added value in the game machine server 3100 when the added value of the achievement status information is generated by a device different from the slot machine 1010 such as the mobile phone 2100 and the home game machine. This is a subroutine that indicates a process for determining an additional value of achievement status information when a player plays a game on a device different from the slot machine 1010 such as a mobile phone 2100 or a home-use game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the process for executing the master-slave effect. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the process for executing a plurality of effects. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the process for executing a continuous effect. It is a time chart which shows the outline of the unit effect which is executed when the master-slave effect is executed. It is a time chart which shows the outline of the unit effect which is executed when a plurality of effects are executed. This is a time chart that outlines the unit effects that are executed when a continuous effect is executed. Shows smartphones and installed applications. The mobile phone communication system 2000 is shown. Shows the display screen of a smartphone. Shows the display screen of a smartphone. Shows the display screen of a smartphone. Shows the display screen of a smartphone. Shows the display screen of a smartphone. Shows the display screen of a smartphone. Shows the display screen of a smartphone. It is a front view which shows the front surface of the slot machine 1010 which concerns on this Embodiment (a modified example). It is a pattern layout drawing of a drum. It is a symbol arrangement drawing of a drum. It is a concept of a lottery table. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the combination (re-game combination or small combination) for pushing. It is a detailed explanatory drawing of the combination (re-game combination or small combination) for pushing. It is a block diagram of a transition replay role. This is the main part of the game state transition diagram (RT state). It is a figure which shows the kind of a symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a pattern layout drawing of a drum. It is a concept of a lottery table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol display state of a reel window part in time series.

Hereinafter, examples of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
<<<<< Pachinko machine system 10 >>>>>
FIG. 1 shows an outline of the overall configuration of the gaming machine system 10 including the gaming machine according to the present invention. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine system 10 includes a slot machine 1010, a mobile phone communication system 2000, and a server system 3000.
<<< Mobile Phone Communication System 2000 >>>
The mobile phone communication system 2000 includes a mobile phone 2100, a base station 2200, a packet network 2300, and a center server 2400.

In the mobile phone communication system 2000 shown in FIG. 1, the mobile phone 2100 is connected to the packet network 2300 via the base station 2200. The mobile phone 2100 can transmit and receive voice data, character data, and image data to and from each other via the packet network 2300. In particular, as will be described later, the mobile phone 2100 is included in the QR code of the slot machine 1010 (the QR code of the two-dimensional bar code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Incorporated) via the packet network 2300. The game-related information (including the "stage setting value") can be transmitted to the game machine server 3100. Further, the mobile phone 2100 can receive the password generated by the gaming machine server 3100 via the packet network 2300. The password will be described in detail later.
<< Mobile Phone 2100 >>
The mobile phone 2100 is a portable telephone using wireless communication, and is a telephone that wirelessly communicates with a packet network 2300 configured by a base station 2200, which will be described later. The specific configuration of the mobile phone 2100 will be described later.

Further, instead of the mobile phone 2100, a mobile information terminal (so-called PDA, smartphone), a communicable game machine, or the like may be used.
<< Base Station 2200 >>
The base station 2200 is a base for wirelessly connecting to the mobile phone 2100, and is a device at the end of the packet network 2300, which will be described later. The base station 2200 is installed on a utility pole or the roof of a building. The base stations 2200 are connected to each other by a wired or wireless network, and constitute a packet network 2300 described later.
<< Packet Network 2300 >>
The packet network 2300 is a data communication network for once dividing data to be transmitted / received into packets and transmitting / receiving these one by one (hereinafter referred to as packet communication) when performing data communication using the mobile phone 2100. .. Each of the plurality of packets is transmitted through a free line on the packet network.
<< Center Server 2400 >>
The mobile phone 2100 can access the center server 2400 by packet communication via the packet network 2300. The center server 2400 communicates with the game machine server 3100 connected to the network 3200, which will be described later, in response to the request from the mobile phone 2100, and provides various information in response to the request from the mobile phone 2100. It is acquired from 3100 and the acquired information is passed to the requesting mobile phone 2100. As a result, the operator of the mobile phone 2100 can acquire desired information from the gaming machine server 3100 via the packet network 2300 or the center server 2400, regardless of where he / she is, such as when he / she is out.

The center server 2400 described above stores in advance a database (not shown) in which a telephone number assigned in advance to each of the mobile phones 2100 and a user ID for identifying the owner of the mobile phone 2100 are associated with each other. Has been done. When connecting the mobile phone 2100 to the game machine server 3100 in response to the request from the mobile phone 2100, first, the telephone number of the mobile phone 2100 described above is transmitted from the mobile phone 2100 to the center server 2400. Next, the center server 2400 searches the above-mentioned database based on the transmitted telephone number, obtains the user ID of the mobile phone 2100, and transmits the obtained user ID to the gaming machine server 3100. By doing so, when the game machine server 3100 is accessed from the mobile phone 2100, the user ID of the mobile phone 2100 is acquired, and the request from the mobile phone 2100 is based on the acquired user ID of the mobile phone 2100. It is possible to execute the processing according to.

The information for identifying the operator of the mobile phone 2100 may be unique identification information such as the user ID and telephone number described above, as well as the serial number of the mobile phone 2100 that can identify the operator. Further, the gaming machine server 3100 stores the user ID transmitted from the center server 2400 in the management database server 3178.
<<< Server System 3000 >>>
The server system 3000 includes a gaming machine server 3100 and a network 3200.
<< Game machine server 3100 >>
As described above, the gaming machine server 3100 can be accessed from the mobile phone 2100 via the packet network 2300 or the network 3200.

In the game machine server 3100, the game-related information included in the QR code displayed on the slot machine 1010 is transmitted from the mobile phone 2100. The game machine server 3100 stores the transmitted game-related information in a predetermined storage means. The game-related information will be described in detail later.

Further, a password is generated in response to the password transmission request transmitted from the mobile phone 2100, and the generated password is transmitted to the mobile phone 2100.

Further, when the conditions for setting the effect in the slot machine 1010 are transmitted from the mobile phone 2100, the gaming machine server 3100 generates a password according to the set conditions, and the generated password is used in the mobile phone 2100. Send to.

Various processes executed by the gaming machine server 3100 will be described later. The detailed configuration of the gaming machine server 3100 will also be described later.
<<< Configuration of mobile phone 2100 >>>
FIG. 2 shows the hardware configuration of the mobile phone 2100 described above. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, even if there are a plurality of mobile phones 2100, each of them has the same configuration.

As shown in FIG. 2, a central processing unit (hereinafter referred to as a CPU) 2102, a ROM (read-only memory) 2104, and a RAM (random access memory) 2106 are connected to the input / output bus 2140. The ROM 2104 may be used in advance in a program shown in FIGS. 17, 18 and 19 described later, a program for controlling various devices such as a browser for browsing a WEB site and a display device described later, and a mobile phone 2100. Remember the assigned phone number. Further, the RAM 2106 executes various data such as character data such as a telephone number and an email, received image data, voice data to be emitted when an incoming call arrives, and the programs shown in FIGS. 17, 18, and 19. Memorize the values of variables used when you do.

Further, the input / output bus 2140 controls a display control circuit 2112 for controlling a display device 2110 composed of a liquid crystal display, an audio signal processing circuit 2118 for controlling a microphone 2114 and a speaker 2116, and a key 2120 composed of ten keys and operation keys. An input interface (hereinafter referred to as an input I / F) 2122, a communication interface (hereinafter referred to as a communication I / F) 2126 for transmitting and receiving information to and from the packet network 2300 via an antenna 2124, and imaging. The control circuit 2130 is connected.

Further, the key 2120 is operated by the operator of the mobile phone 2100. Further, the communication I / F 2126 transmits the input information based on the input operation of the key 2120 by the operator and the telephone number assigned in advance to the mobile phone 2100 through the packet network 2300 or the network 3200 described above. Further, the communication I / F 2126 receives the information transmitted through the packet network 2300 or the network 3200. The display device 2110 displays the input information input by the operator by operating the key 2120 and the information transmitted through the packet network 2300 or the network 3200.

An image pickup device 2128 is connected to the image pickup control circuit 2130. The image sensor 2128 is composed of, for example, a CCD image sensor (Charge Coupled Device Image Sensor), a C-MOS image sensor (Seamos image sensor), and the like. By detecting light from the object, the image sensor 2128 takes an image of the object, converts it into an electric signal indicating the image, and outputs the image. As shown in FIG. 1B, the image sensor 2128 is provided on the back surface of the mobile phone 2100. The image sensor 2128 can image an object from the back surface of the mobile phone 2100. By operating the predetermined key 2120 by the operator of the mobile phone 2100, the object can be imaged as a still image or a moving image, and the imaged data can be stored in a storage means such as a RAM 2106. In particular, in the present embodiment, the image sensor 2128 photographs the QR code displayed on the image display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010, which will be described later.
<<< Configuration of game machine server 3100 >>>
FIG. 3 shows the hardware configuration of the above-mentioned gaming machine server 3100.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine server 3100 includes a WEB / content server 3120 and a management server 3140.
<< WEB / Content Server 3120 >>
A central processing unit (hereinafter referred to as a CPU) 3152, a ROM (read-only memory) 3154, and a RAM (random access memory) 3156 are connected to the input / output bus 3150 of the WEB / content server 3120. The ROM 3154 stores a program shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 19, 25, 27 or 28 described later, and a program for controlling various devices such as the WEB server 3158 and the content server 3160 described later. ..

A WEB server 3158 and a content server 3160 are also connected to the input / output bus 3150. The WEB server 3158 and the content server 3160 are made of a storage medium such as a hard disk drive that can store a large amount of data. As will be described later, the WEB server 3158 mainly stores character data and image data for viewing. These display data are created in a language conforming to Compact HTML, which is a subset of so-called HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language), and not only text information but also image data and URLs indicating the locations of other WEB servers (URLs indicating the locations of other WEB servers. Uniform Resource Locator) information can be incorporated.

Further, the content server 3160 mainly stores image data and audio data for downloading to the mobile phone 2100, and contents such as the application program shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 19, 25, 27 or 28. do.

Further, an external connection interface (hereinafter referred to as an external connection I / F) 3162 and an internal connection interface (hereinafter referred to as an internal connection I / F) 3164 are also connected to the input / output bus 3150. ing. The external connection I / F 3162 is a communication interface for connecting to the network 3200 shown in FIG. The external connection I / F 3162 sends / receives data to / from the mobile phone 2100 and data to / from the center server 2400. In addition, management data stored in the management database server 3178, which will be described later, is transmitted to and received from the WEB / content server 3120 via the internal connection I / F3164.
<< Management Server 3140 >>
A central processing unit (hereinafter referred to as a CPU) 3172, a ROM (read-only memory) 3174, and a RAM (random access memory) 3176 are connected to the input / output bus 3170 of the management server 3140. The ROM 3174 stores a program for transmitting and receiving management data in response to a command from the WEB / content server 3120.

A management database server 3178 is connected to the input / output bus 3170. The management database server 3178 is made of a storage medium such as a hard disk drive that can store a large amount of data. As will be described later, the management database server 3178 mainly stores a management database such as personal information of the operator of the mobile phone 2100 such as a user ID.

Further, an internal connection I / F 3180 is also connected to the input / output bus 3170. The internal connection I / F 3180 is also connected to the internal connection I / F 3164 of the WEB / content server 3120, and the information transmitted from the WEB / content server 3120 can be stored in the management database server 3178 for management. The information stored in the database server 3178 can be transmitted to the WEB / content server 3120.
<<< Slot Machine 1010 >>>
<< Configuration of slot machine 1010 >>
FIG. 4 is a front view showing the front surface of the slot machine 1010 according to the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an internal structure of the slot machine 1010.

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the slot machine 1010 includes a box-shaped base portion 1020 and a front door 1040. The front door 1040 is pivotally supported on the left side of the base 1020 and is openable and closable on the front side of the base 1020. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the front door 1040 is closed with respect to the base portion 1020, and FIG. 5 shows an internal structure that can be visually recognized with the front door 1040 opened approximately 180 degrees with respect to the base portion 1020.
<Front of front door 1040>
The front door 1040 is attached to the base portion 1020 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the front surface of the base portion 1020 when closed. As shown in FIG. 4, the front surface of the front door 1040 is mainly provided with a member related to operation and a member related to display. Further, a circuit board for control is mainly provided on the back surface of the front door 1040.
<Members related to operation>
As shown in FIG. 4, an operation panel 1041 extending in the horizontal direction is provided at substantially the center of the front side (player side) of the front door 1040. A start switch 1042 and three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are provided on the front side of the operation panel 1041. A 1-bet switch 1062, a 2-bet switch 1064, a maximum bet switch 1066, and a medal insertion slot 1046 are provided on the upper surface side of the operation panel 1041. At the bottom of the front door 1040, a saucer 1048 for receiving medals paid out based on the result of the unit game is also provided. In this specification, a game in which the progress is determined by the mode of displaying the symbols attached to the three reels, which will be described later, is referred to as a unit game. This unit game will be described in detail later.
<Start switch 1042>
The start switch 1042 described above is a switch operated by a player to advance a unit game. When the player operates the start switch 1042, a start signal is emitted from the start switch 1042. The start signal emitted from the start switch 1042 is supplied to the main control board 1032, which will be described later. By detecting the start signal, the main control board 1032 starts the control of the rotational drive of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R, which will be described later.
<Stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c>
The three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c described above are also switches operated by the player to advance the unit game. When the player operates the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c, stop signals are separately emitted from each of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c. The stop signals emitted from each of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are supplied to the main control board 1032 described later. By detecting the stop signal, the main control board 1032 separately starts the control of the stop drive of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R, which will be described later.
<Reel display window 1051 and reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R>
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, a front frame 1050 is formed on the front door 1040. A reel display window 1051 is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 1050. As shown in FIG. 5, the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R are rotatably housed in the reel unit 1028. The front surface 1029 of the reel unit 1028 is open, and as will be described later, the player can visually recognize the type of the symbol located on the front surface 1029 of the reel unit 1028. The reel unit 1028 is supported by a support plate 1026 fixed to the base portion 1020. When the front door 1040 is closed, the reel display window 1051 is located in front of the front surface 1029 of the reel unit 1028. The reel display window 1051 is covered with a transparent member, and when the front door 1040 is closed, the player can see the symbols drawn on the three reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R through the reel display window 1051. The type can be visually recognized.

Each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R has a plurality of spoke portions and an annular frame. Each of the plurality of spoke portions is formed so as to extend in the radial direction from the shaft portion serving as the rotation center of each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R toward the outer circumference. The annular frame is made of resin or the like, and a band on which 21 patterns are drawn is attached to the frame. By doing so, 21 symbols can be attached to each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R.

Each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R is provided with a shaft portion rotatably provided on the motors 1086a, 1086b, and 1086c. Each of the motors 1086a, 1086b, and 1086c is composed of a stepping motor, and when a pulse signal consisting of one pulse is supplied, it rotates by a predetermined angle, and when a pulse signal consisting of 504 pulses is supplied, 1 Rotate. The shaft portion of the reel 1030L is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 1086a, the shaft portion of the reel 1030C is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 1086b, and the shaft portion of the reel 1030R is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 1086c. By doing so, the reel 1030L can also rotate once by rotating the motor 1086a once, the reel 1030C can also rotate once by rotating the motor 1086b, and the reel 1030R can rotate once by rotating the motor 1086c. Can also make one rotation.

A detection projecting piece (not shown) is attached to one of the spoke portions of each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. The detection protruding piece is for detecting the rotation position of each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. As the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R rotate, the detection protrusion also rotates and moves. Rotational position sensors 1083a, 1083b, and 1083c are provided in the vicinity of each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. The rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, and 1083c are composed of a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion (not shown), and when a rotating detection protrusion passes between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, one pulse is generated. It is configured to emit a pulse signal (hereinafter, referred to as an index signal) composed of the above. By doing so, each time each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R makes one rotation, a pulse signal consisting of one pulse can be emitted. The position where the above-mentioned detection protrusion is provided can be set as the origin of each rotation position of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. The rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, 1083c are electrically connected to the main control board 1032 described later, and the index signal emitted from the rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, 1083c is supplied to the main control board 1032. The main control board 1032 can determine when each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R is located at the origin by detecting the pulse included in the index signal from the rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, and 1083c.

Further, a light emitting diode (not shown) is provided as a backlight inside each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R, and light can be irradiated from the inside of each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R. It has become like.

As described above, 21 symbols are attached to each of the three reels 1030L to 1030R at equal intervals. The types of these symbols can be identified by the player, for example, the number "red 7" and the fruit "cherry". An example of a symbol attached to each of the three reels 1030L to 1030R is shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 6, in order from the left side, the first column shows the symbol number, the second column shows the symbol attached to the reel 1030L, and the third column shows the symbol attached to the reel 1030C. , Fourth row shows the symbol attached to the reel 1030R. As will be described later, the symbol numbers shown in the first column correspond to the rotation positions of the reels 1030L to 1030R, and to identify the 21 symbols attached to each of the three reels 1030L to 1030R. It is the 0th to 20th number of. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the 0th symbol of the left reel 1030L is "lever", the 8th symbol is "red 7", and the 19th symbol is "cherry".

Note that FIG. 6 described above shows an example of the symbols attached to each of the three reels 1030L to 1030R, and schematically illustrates the correspondence between the symbol numbers and the symbols attached to each of the three reels 1030L to 1030R. It is also a table showing the target. In the main control means 1100, which will be described later, the correspondence relationship between this symbol number and the symbol attached to each of the three reels 1030L to 1030R is stored as a table, and by referring to this correspondence relationship, the stopped symbol Can be obtained. The correspondence will be described later.

Further, as will be described later, when the three reels 1030L to 1030R are stopped, nine symbols are visually stopped and displayed on the reel display window 1051.

The area formed by the reel display window 1051 corresponds to the "design display area". <Reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R and stop switches 1044a, 1044b, 1044c>
The left reel 1030L corresponds to the left stop switch 1044a. When the player operates the left stop switch 1044a, the left reel 1030L stops. The middle reel 1030C corresponds to the central stop switch 1044b. When the player operates the central stop switch 1044b, the middle reel 1030C stops. The right reel 1030R corresponds to the right stop switch 1044c. When the player operates the right stop switch 1044c, the right reel 1030R stops.
<Reel display window 1051 and winning lines L1 to L5>
As described above, the reel display window 1051 is covered with a transparent member. As shown in FIG. 4, five winning lines L1 to L5 are drawn on the reel display window 1051. By doing so, the player can visually recognize the type of the symbol through the reel display window 1051 and also can visually recognize the five winning lines L1 to L5 on the reel display window 1051. ..

The winning line L1 is a middle straight line extending in the horizontal direction, the winning line L2 is an upper straight line extending in the horizontal direction, and the winning line L3 is a lower straight line extending in the horizontal direction. The winning line L4 is a straight line extending from the upper left to the lower right, and the winning line L5 is a straight line extending from the lower left to the upper right. In the present specification, the position of the winning line L1 may be referred to as the middle row, the position of the winning line L2 may be referred to as the upper row, and the position of the winning line L3 may be referred to as the lower row.

In the example shown in FIG. 4, five winning lines L1 to L5 are drawn on the reel display window 1051, but if the winning line is clear to the player, the reel display window The winning line may not be drawn on the 1051.
<Bet switches 1062, 1064 and 1066 and winning lines L1 to L5>
When a predetermined number or more of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 1046 of the operation panel 1041 described above, the number of inserted medals is counted by the medal counter (not shown), and the number of medals is stored as the number of credits. The 1-bet switch 1062 described above is a switch for targeting one medal out of the stored credits as a bet target for a game. Further, the 2-bet switch 1064 is a switch for targeting two medals out of the number of credits for betting on the game, and the maximum bet switch 1066 is a switch for betting three medals out of the number of credits on the game. It is a switch for targeting.

As described above, five winning lines L1 to L5 are drawn on the reel display window 1051. When the player operates the 1-bet switch 1062, one of the five winning lines, for example, the winning line L1, is activated. When the 2-bet switch 1064 is operated, three of the five winning lines, for example, winning lines L1 to L3, are activated. When the maximum bet switch 1066 is operated, all five winning lines, i.e. L1 to L5, are activated. As described above, the three bet switches 1062, 1064 and 1066 function as effective line-making means for determining the number of medals to be bet on the game and activating the winning lines L1 to L5.
<Effective line>
As described above, the three bet switches 1062, 1064 and 1066 function as game medium number setting means for activating the winning lines L1 to L5 when operated by the player. When the player operates the 1-bet switch 1062, the winning line L1 is activated, when the 2-bet switch 1064 is operated, the winning lines L1 to L3 are activated, and when the maximum bet switch 1066 is operated, the winning line is activated. All of L1 to L5 are activated. As described above, the activated winning line is referred to as a valid line.

The sequence of symbols stopped on the valid line is the target of judgment as to whether or not a prize has been won. For example, when the arrangement of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" is aligned on the above-mentioned effective line L1, it is determined that the player has won the role of big bonus. The types of roles will be described later. Further, when the arrangement of symbols that do not form a combination on the effective line L1 is stopped, it is determined that the prize has not been won. On the other hand, even if it is a winning line, when the winning line is not activated, the order of "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" is aligned on the winning line. However, the winning line is not subject to judgment as to whether or not a prize has been won.
<Image display device 1034>
An image display device 1034 is provided above the front door 1040. An effect image is displayed on the image display device 1034. The effect image is an image displayed as the game progresses, and is mainly an image including various information related to the game. For example, in one unit game, the lottery process is performed by the winning combination lottery means 1120, which will be described later. An effect image suggesting the lottery result based on the lottery result of the lottery process is displayed on the image display device 1034.

The unit game performed by the slot machine 1010 is a game in which a game of a single process can be repeated. This single process game is called a unit game. The unit game will be described in detail later.

The effect image displayed on the image display device 1034 includes one that displays various types of information in the form of characters and one that displays various types of information in the form of drawings other than characters. The information displayed in the form of characters is mainly used to directly make various kinds of information visible to the player. In this case, symbols that visually represent words such as numerical values, alphabets, hiragana, katakana, and kanji as means of transmitting human intentions and emotions are used as characters. In addition, the information displayed in the form of a drawing is mainly used to indirectly make various kinds of information visible to the player. In this case, an image of a character showing a creature such as a person or an animal, a pseudo-living body such as a robot, or an image showing another machine, a building, a landscape, or the like is included.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the effect performed by the image display device 1034 notifies the information regarding the lottery result of the winning combination. For example, information indicating that a predetermined combination has been won by the combination lottery means 1120, which will be described later, is displayed on the image display device 1034. In particular, in the present embodiment, when a small winning combination is won, information indicating to the player is displayed on the image display device 1034.
<Speaker 1036>
As shown in FIG. 4, the speakers 1036 are provided on both the left and right sides of the above-mentioned image display device 1034. The speaker 1036 performs a voice effect according to the progress of the game. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the sub-control board 1052 described later, a sound corresponding to the condition is emitted from the speaker 1036. For example, based on the lottery result of the lottery process performed by the combination lottery means 1120 described later, sound effects, music, and the like suggesting the lottery result are emitted from the speaker 1036.
<Lamp 1038>
The lamp 1038 is provided above the front door 1040, as shown in FIG. With the lamp 1038, the effect of light is performed according to the progress of the game. When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the sub-control board 1052 described later, the lamp 1038 is turned on or blinks according to the condition. For example, the lamp 1038 is lit in a predetermined color or a predetermined pattern according to the type of the combination so as to suggest the lottery result based on the lottery result of the lottery process performed by the combination lottery means 1120 described later. Flashes with.

The effect of light is not limited to the lamp 1038 described above, but also includes back lamps (not shown) arranged inside the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R.
<Base part 1020>
The base portion 1020 shown in FIG. 5 is assembled of wood or the like to form a box shape having an open front surface. A power supply unit 1022 for supplying power to various devices mounted on the slot machine 1010 and a medal payout device 1024 including a hopper for storing medals are provided below the inside of the base unit 1020. Further, a support plate 1026 is provided above the power supply unit 1022 and the medal payout device 1024. The support plate 1026 supports the reel unit 1028 that rotatably accommodates the reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. Further, a main control board 1032 that controls the game performed by the slot machine 1010 as a whole is provided on the upper part of the inside of the base portion 1020.
<Setting switch 1027>
A setting switch 1027 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 1040. The setting switch 1027 is a switch operated by a person such as an administrator of the slot machine 1010. A set value for setting a lottery table to be used when performing a winning combination lottery process by the winning combination lottery means 1120, which will be described later, is set by an operation by a person such as an administrator.

In order to set or change the set value, the input from the setting switch 1027 is accepted by operating another switch provided in the slot machine 1010. A person such as an administrator sets a desired set value by pressing the setting switch 1027 at least once. For example, when the set value (also referred to as “step setting value” or “setting information”) is 1 to 6, each time the setting switch 1027 is pressed once, “1” → “2” → “3”. → “4” → “5” → “6” → “1” → ... It is preferable that the set value changes by one. In order to determine the set value and store the set value, another switch provided in the slot machine 1010 is operated. The fixed set value is stored in the set value storage means 1170 described later.
<Main control board 1032>
The main control board 1032 is a control board for controlling the start and stop of rotation of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R, and for controlling the entire game such as the progress of the game performed by the slot machine 1010.

The main control board 1032 has a CPU (central processing unit) (not shown) for performing calculations and the like, a ROM (read-only memory) (not shown) for storing game programs, and a RAM for temporarily storing each data. (Random access memory) (not shown) and the like are included.

For example, the ROM stores a program for executing the flowchart shown in FIGS. 10 to 14 described later. The RAM also stores the values of variables used in this program. These CPUs, ROMs, and RAMs are electrically connected by an input / output bus so that data signals and address signals can be input / output.

Further, the main control board 1032 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned bet switches 1062, 1064 and 1066. When the player operates the bet switches 1062, 1064 and 1066, bet instruction signals are emitted from each of the bet switches 1062, 1064 and 1066 to the main control board 1032.

Further, the main control board 1032 is electrically connected to the above-mentioned start switch 1042 and the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c. As described above, when the player operates the start switch 1042, a start signal is emitted from the start switch 1042 and supplied to the main control board 1032. When the player operates the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c, stop signals are emitted from each of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c and supplied to the main control board 1032. When the start signal emitted from the start switch 1042 is supplied to the main control board 1032, the main control board 1032 controls the rotation of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R. Further, when the stop signal emitted from the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c is supplied to the main control board 1032, the main control board 1032 corresponds to the operated stop switch among the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R. Controls the stop of the reel.
<Sub control board 1052>
As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 1052 is arranged on the upper part of the back surface of the front door 1040. The sub-control board 1052 is a board that mainly controls the effect during the game. For example, control is performed such as displaying an effect image on the image display device 1034, emitting sound effects and music from the speaker 1036, and turning on and blinking the lamp 1038. The sub-control board 1052 includes a CPU for performing calculations (not shown), a ROM for storing the effect program and effect data (not shown), a RAM for temporarily storing each data (not shown), and the like. include.

For example, the ROM stores an effect control program for controlling the effects shown in FIGS. 16 to 15 and image data and audio data for the effects. Further, the RAM stores the values of the variables used in the above-mentioned effect control program. These CPUs, ROMs, and RAMs are electrically connected by an input / output bus so that data signals and address signals can be input / output.

The sub control board 1052 is electrically connected to the main control board 1032 by a harness (not shown). The main control board 1032 transmits commands, information, and the like to the sub control board 1052. The main control board 1032 described above controls the entire game in an integrated manner, whereas the sub control board 1052 belongs to the lower level of the main control board 1032 and is based on commands and information sent from the main control board 1032. And control the whole production.
<< Overview of unit games in slot machine 1010 >>
When the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are stopped, the symbol is located on the winning lines L1 to L5. The unit game in the slot machine 1010 is a game in which the result of the game is determined by the arrangement of the symbols located on the activated winning line. Therefore, the player visually observes the symbols on the rotating reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R, and determines that the arrangement of the symbols constituting the predetermined combination is optimal so as to be aligned on the activated winning line. At the same timing, the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are operated to stop the reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R.

As will be described later, a plurality of types of roles are predetermined. At least one type of combination is determined by the combination lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120, which will be described later. Such determination of at least one type of combination is referred to as "hit". Further, depending on the combination lottery process, any type of combination may not be determined, and this case is referred to as "off".

Further, the unit game performed by the slot machine 1010 is a game in which a game of a single process can be repeated. This single process game is called a unit game. The unit game starts based on the operation of the start switch 1042 by the player and ends based on the operation of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c. From the player's point of view, the unit game is from the time when the start switch 1042 is operated to start rotating the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R until all the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R stop. It is a single-reel game. As described above, the unit game is started every time the player operates the start switch 1042. In addition, in this specification, when it is expressed as a unit game, it may mean a game in which a unit game is repeated, or it may mean a single unit game.

As described above, the unit game is started based on the player operating the start switch 1042. More specifically, at the start time of this unit game, when the player operates the start switch 1042, a start signal is emitted from the start switch 1042, and the start signal emitted from the start switch 1042 is used as the main control board 1032. Is preferably detected. Further, the time point at which the unit game is started may be when it is possible to visually recognize that the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R have started to rotate.

Further, as described above, the unit game is ended by operating the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c. At the end of this unit game, more specifically, the player operates the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c to stop the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R, and the main control board 1032. It is preferable that the end processing such as the winning process is completed. Further, the time when the unit game ends may be when the main control board 1032 detects that the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R have stopped. Further, the end point of the unit game may be when it can be visually recognized that the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R have stopped.
<Game state>
The unit game is executed in various game states. The gaming state is defined so that the benefits given to the player are different. For example, the gaming state includes a normal gaming state, a special gaming state, and the like.

As will be described later, this special gaming state includes a first-class BB gaming state, a second-class BB gaming state, an RB gaming state, an SB gaming state, and a CB gaming state. The first-class BB gaming state is a gaming state that can be transferred when the first-class BB combination is won. The second-class BB gaming state is a gaming state that can be transferred when the second-class BB combination is won. The RB game state is a game state that can be transferred when the RB combination is won. The SB game state is a game state that can be transferred when the SB combination is won. The CB gaming state is a gaming state that can be transferred when the CB combination is won.

The above-mentioned normal gaming states include a normal general gaming state, a first-class BB winning general gaming state, a second-class BB winning general gaming state, and an RB winning general gaming state. The first-class BB winning general gaming state is the normal gaming state in which the first-class BB combination is won. The second-class BB winning general gaming state is a normal gaming state in which the second-class BB winning combination is won. The RB winning general gaming state is a normal gaming state in which the RB combination is won. The normal general gaming state is a normal gaming state in which none of the first-class BB combination, the second-class BB combination, and the RB combination has been won.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned gaming state, there is also a re-gaming high-probability gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as RT gaming state). This RT gaming state is a gaming state defined so that the re-gaming combination, which will be described later, can be easily won, that is, a gaming state in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is increased and the combination lottery process is performed. For example, it is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the re-gaming combination is higher than 10/73.

The transition to the RT gaming state is when the player wins the first-class BB combination, the second-class BB role, or the RB role, which will be described later, or the above-mentioned first-class BB gaming state, second-class BB gaming state, or RB gaming state. When the game state shifts to, when the first type BB game state, the second type BB game state, or the RB game state ends, or when the first type BB role, the second type BB role, or the RB role is won. This can be performed when there is no pattern, or when a specific pattern is aligned when the game is not in the first-class BB game state, the second-class BB game state, or the RB game state.

Further, as described above, in the RT game state, the winning probability of the re-game combination may be increased and the combination lottery process may be performed, and when the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, the RT game state may be shifted to the RT game state. , A plurality of RT gaming states can be provided. It is possible to make the probability of winning the re-game different in each of these plurality of RT game states.

As described above, the unit game is performed by defining one of these game states. The game state is stored as a flag in the storage means of the main control means 1100. The flag is set in the process of step S1122 of FIG. 11, which will be described later. It is not necessary to determine all of the above-mentioned gaming states, and it may be appropriately selected and determined according to the unit game to be advanced or deployed by the slot machine 1010.
<Type of role>
The types of roles described above include, for example, small roles, replaying roles, special roles, and the like.

The small role is a role of paying out a predetermined number of medals. There are also multiple types of small roles. The small combination is often named by using the type of symbol attached to the three reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R. For example, the types of patterns include "watermelon", "bell", "cherry" and the like. Therefore, a small role in which the symbol "watermelon" is aligned on the effective line is called a watermelon role, and a small role in which the symbol "bell" is aligned on the effective line is called a bell role. Further, when the symbol "cherry" of the left reel 1030L is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is assumed that the prize is won regardless of the type of the symbol of the middle reel 1030C and the right reel 1030R. This role is called the cherry role.

As described above, the small role can include a plurality of types such as a watermelon role, a bell role, and a cherry role. Furthermore, the probability of winning these roles and the number of medals to be paid out can be different for each of these plurality of types.

The re-gaming role is a role in which the unit game can be performed again without betting a further predetermined number of medals while maintaining the number of bets (number of bets) in the unit game currently performed. .. In addition, in this specification, a replay combination is also referred to as a replay combination or an RP combination, and a unit game performed when a replay combination is won is referred to as a replay (also referred to as a replay or RP).

The special role is a role that can shift the gaming state of the unit game from the normal general gaming state to the special gaming state (a game that is advantageous to the player). This special role includes, for example, a single bonus (hereinafter referred to as SB role), a regular bonus role (hereinafter referred to as RB role), and a first-class big bonus role (hereinafter referred to as a first-class BB role). There are a challenge bonus role (hereinafter referred to as a CB role) and a type 2 big bonus role (hereinafter referred to as a type 2 BB role). Further, the special game state includes a single bonus game state, a regular bonus game state, a first-class big bonus game state, a challenge bonus game state, and a second-class big bonus game state, as will be described later.

The SB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the single bonus gaming state (ordinary accessory) (hereinafter, referred to as the SB gaming state). When the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the SB combination is aligned with the effective line, the gaming state of the unit game is shifted to the SB gaming state. No medals will be paid out when shifting to the SB game state. The unit game in the SB game state is a game in which a predetermined combination is won with a high probability, and ends with one unit game.

The RB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the regular bonus gaming state (type 1 special accessory) (hereinafter, referred to as the RB gaming state). When the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the RB combination is aligned with the effective line, the gaming state of the unit game is shifted to the RB gaming state. There is no medal payout when shifting to the RB game state. The unit game in the RB game state is a game in which a predetermined combination is won with a high probability. The RB game state ends when the number of unit games exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times) and when a predetermined combination wins a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times).

The first-class BB combination shifts the gaming state of the unit game to the first-class big bonus gaming state (the accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special bonus) (hereinafter, referred to as the first-class BB gaming state). It is a role to make you. When the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the first-class BB combination is aligned with the effective line, the gaming state of the unit game is shifted to the first-class BB gaming state. No medals will be paid out when shifting to the Type 1 BB game state. The first-class BB gaming state comprises the gaming state of the RB gaming state described above, and at least one unit game can be performed in this RB gaming state. Further, in one type 1 BB game state, it is a game state in which the RB game state can be repeated a plurality of times. The first-class BB game state ends when the number of medals paid out in the first-class BB game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300). This first-class BB combination can also include a plurality of types. Furthermore, the probability of winning these roles can be different for each of these plurality of types.

The CB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the challenge bonus gaming state (type 2 special accessory) (hereinafter, referred to as the CB gaming state). When the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the CB combination is aligned with the effective line, the gaming state of the unit game is shifted to the CB gaming state. There is no medal payout when shifting to the CB game state. When the gaming state becomes the CB gaming state, the stop control of a certain reel among the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R can be changed. Specifically, the stop switch corresponding to the fixed reel is controlled to stop the reel within 75 milliseconds (usually 190 milliseconds) with respect to the time when the player operates the reel. Further, when the gaming state becomes the CB gaming state, for the predetermined small winning combination, the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination is aligned on the effective line regardless of the result of the lottery process by the winning combination lottery means 1120 described later. be able to. The CB game state ends with one unit game.

The second-class BB combination shifts the gaming state of the unit game to the second-class big bonus gaming state (the accessory continuous operation device related to the second-class special bonus) (hereinafter, referred to as the second-class BB gaming state). It is a role to make you. When the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the Type 2 BB combination is aligned with the effective line, the game state of the unit game is shifted to the Type 2 BB game state. No medals will be paid out when shifting to the Type 2 BB game state. The second type BB game state consists of two game states, a CB high probability winning state in which the above-mentioned CB combination is won with a high probability, and a above-mentioned CB game state, and a unit game can be performed in each of the two game states. .. Further, when the gaming state shifts from the CB high-probability winning state to the CB gaming state, the CB gaming state can be returned to the CB high-probability winning state again. The second-class BB game state ends when the number of medals paid out in the second-class BB game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 286 medals). Further, when the gaming state is the second type BB gaming state, if the above-mentioned SB combination or RB combination can be won by the lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120, the SB combination or RB combination is won. Occasionally, the Type 2 BB gaming state ends.

This type 2 BB combination can also include a plurality of types. Furthermore, the probability of winning these roles can be different for each of these plurality of types.
<< Functions of Slot Machine 1010 >>
FIG. 7 is a functional block diagram showing an outline of the main control functions in the slot machine 1010. As shown in FIG. 7, the slot machine 1010 mainly includes an operation means 1500, a game medium number setting means 1600, a set value setting means 1700, a main control means 1100, a sub control means 1200, and a symbol display means. 1400 and 1300 directing means are included.
<Operating means 1500>
The operation means 1500 is operated by the player, and a signal indicating that the operation is performed is emitted to the main control means 1100, which will be described later, based on the operation of the player. The operating means 1500 preferably includes a start switch 1042 and a stop switch 1044a to 1044c. When operated by the player, the start switch 1042 emits a start signal indicating that the operation has been performed to the main control means 1100, which will be described later. Further, each of the stop switches 1044a to 1044c also emits a stop signal indicating the operation to the main control means 1100 when operated by the player.

As described above, the start signal emitted from the start switch 1042 to the main control means 1100 starts the rotation of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R, and determines the trigger for starting the unit game described above.

Further, the corresponding reels of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are stopped by the stop signals issued from each of the stop switches 1044a to 1044c to the main control means 1100. Based on the fact that all three stop switches 1044a to 1044c are operated and all three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are stopped, the trigger for the end of the unit game is determined. In this way, the unit game is started based on the above-mentioned start signal being issued, and the unit game is ended based on the stop signal being issued from the stop switch corresponding to the reel to be stopped at the end.

There are a plurality of types of operation modes for operating the three stop switches 1044a to 1044c. For example, the three stop switches 1044a to 1044c can be operated in different orders and timings. Specifically, the stop switches 1044a → 1044b → 1044c and 1044b → 1044a → 1044c, 1044c → 1044b → 1044a can be operated in different order.

As described above, a stop signal is emitted from each of the stop switches 1044a to 1044c to the main control means 1100, and there are a plurality of types of operation modes for operating the stop switches 1044a to 1044c. Therefore, the stop signal is emitted based on the operation mode, and the main control means 1100 in which the stop signal is emitted obtains the operation mode by detecting the order in which the stop signals are emitted and the timing at which the stop signals are emitted. be able to.
<Game medium number setting means 1600 (effective line making means)>
The game medium number setting means 1600 is also operated by the player in the same manner as the operation means 1500, and emits a bet instruction signal to the effect that the operation is based on the player's operation to the main control means 1100, which will be described later. Which of the plurality of winning lines L1 to L5 is to be activated is determined based on the bet instruction signal issued from the game medium number setting means 1600 to the main control means 1100.

The game medium number setting means 1600 may also be operated by the player. The game medium number setting means 1600 preferably includes the above-mentioned 1-bet switch 1062, 2-bet switch 1064, and maximum bet switch 1066.

The number of medals to be bet on the game is determined by the bet instruction signal issued from the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064, or the maximum bet switch 1066 to the main control means 1100. For example, a 1-bet instruction signal issued from the 1-bet switch 1062 to the main control means 1100 makes one medal a target for betting on a game, and a 2-bet instruction signal issued from the 2-bet switch 1064 to the main control means 1100. Therefore, two medals are targeted for betting on the game, and three medals are targeted for betting on the game by the maximum bet instruction signal issued from the maximum bet switch 1066 to the main control means 1100.

Further, as described above, five winning lines L1 to L5 are drawn on the reel display window 1051. When the player operates the 1-bet switch 1062, the winning line L1 is activated. When the 2-bet switch 1064 is operated, the winning lines L1 to L3 are activated. When the maximum bet switch 1066 is operated, L1 to L5 are activated. As described above, the three bet switches 1062, 1064 and 1066 function as effective line-making means for determining the number of medals to be bet on the game and activating the winning lines L1 to L5.
<Set value setting means 1700 (role lottery table designation means)>
The set value setting means 1700 is operated by a person such as an administrator of the slot machine 1010. When the set value setting means 1700 is operated by a person such as an administrator, the set value setting means 1700 uses a lottery table to be used when performing a combination lottery process by the combination lottery means 1120, which will be described later, of a plurality of combination lottery tables. The designated information for designation is sent to the main control means 1100. The designated information is information indicating a so-called set value. For example, when the set values are 1 to 6, designated information indicating the values of "1" to "6" is sent to the main control means 1100. As will be described later, the set value indicated by the designated information sent to the main control means 1100 is stored in the set value storage means 1170. In addition, the information related to the set value to be notified is created based on the set value. The set value (for example, the numerical value of 6) itself may be a value in which the information related to the set value to be notified is the same (for example, the numerical value of 6), and other image information or audio information indicating the numerical value 6 may be used.

The set value setting means 1700 preferably includes the above-mentioned setting switch 1027. <Main control means 1100 (game control means)>
In addition to the operation means 1500 and the game medium number setting means 1600 described above, the sub control means 1200 and the symbol display means 1400 are electrically connected to the main control means 1100. The main control means 1100 controls the entire game such as the progress of the game. The main control means 1100 preferably comprises the above-mentioned main control board 1032.

As described above, the operating means 1500 is electrically connected to the main control means 1100. A start signal is emitted from the start switch 1042 of the operation means 1500 to the main control means 1100. Thereby, it is possible to detect that the start switch 1042 has been operated by the player. A stop signal is emitted to the main control means 1100 from each of the stop switches 1044a to 1044c of the operation means 1500. Thereby, the order and timing of the stop signals emitted from each of the stop switches 1044a to 1044c can be detected.

Further, the game medium number setting means 1600 is electrically connected to the main control means 1100. A bet instruction signal is issued to the main control means 1100 from each of the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064, and the maximum bet switch 1066 of the game medium number setting means 1600. By detecting the bet instruction signal issued, the number of medals to be bet and the setting of the effective line are controlled.

The main control means 1100 includes a combination lottery means 1120, a reel drive control means 1130, a reel rotation position acquisition means 1140, and an effective line storage means 1160.
<Role lottery means 1120 (role lottery means)>
The combination lottery means 1120 draws a predetermined type of combination. As described above, there are various types of roles, such as a small role, a replaying role, and a special role. As described above, the fact that at least one type of combination is determined by the combination lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120 is referred to as "winning", and the fact that neither type of combination is determined is referred to as "missing".

The above-mentioned small winning combination is a role of paying out a predetermined number of medals.

In addition, the re-game combination is a role in which the re-game can be performed while maintaining the number of bets in the unit game currently performed, without targeting a further predetermined number of medals for betting.

The above-mentioned special role is a role of shifting from the normal general gaming state to the special gaming state. The special gaming state is a gaming state in which there is a high possibility that more medals can be obtained than the number of medals that can be obtained in a unit game in the normal general gaming state, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. As described above, the special role includes, for example, an SB role, an RB role, a first-class BB role, a CB role, and a second-class BB role. The SB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the SB gaming state. The RB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the RB gaming state. The first-class BB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the first-class BB gaming state. The CB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the CB gaming state. The second-class BB combination is a role for shifting the gaming state of the unit game to the second-class BB gaming state.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the various winning combinations described above can be won individually, but also at least two winning combinations can be won at the same time, so-called duplicate winning. When multiple winnings are won, any one of the plurality of winning winnings can be won. Even if the winning combination is duplicated, only one of the plurality of winning combination can be won. For example, a small role and a special role can be won in duplicate, or a plurality of small roles can be won in duplicate.

The combination lottery means 1120 includes, for example, a random number generation means 1122, a random number extraction means 1124, and a random number determination means 1126. The random number generation means 1122 generates random numbers (hardware random numbers, etc.) for the winning combination lottery process. The random number extraction means 1124 extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means 1122. The random number determining means 1126 determines whether or not the winning combination is won and the winning combination based on the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means 1124. The winning combination lottery means 1120 constitutes the "winning lottery means" and performs the "winning lottery process".

The "role lottery process" is a process for determining a "win" or "miss" for a game. Specifically, it is executed by the processing of the subroutine shown in FIG. 11 called in step S1006 of FIG. 10, which will be described later.
<Random number generation means 1122>
The random number generation means 1122 continuously generates random numbers in a predetermined range of positive integers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) at predetermined timing intervals.
<Random number extraction means 1124>
The random number extraction means 1124 extracts the random numbers generated by the random number generation means 1122 at a predetermined timing. For example, in this embodiment, a random number is extracted when the start switch 1042 is operated by the player.
<Random number determination means 1126>
The random number determining means 1126 determines the combination corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs by collating the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means 1124 with the lottery table stored in the lottery table storage means 1128 described later. ..
<Lottery table storage means 1128 (role storage means)>
The lottery table storage means 1128 has a lottery table in which the lottery probabilities are stored according to a plurality of gaming states and types of combinations.

As described above, the gaming states of the unit game are, for example, a normal general gaming state, a first-class BB winning general gaming state, a second-class BB winning general gaming state, an RB winning general gaming state, an SB gaming state, and an RB gaming state. , Type 1 BB game state, CB game state, type 2 BB game state, and the like. FIG. 8 shows a table of the relationship between the number of placements corresponding to these plurality of gaming states and the types of combinations. In the example shown in FIG. 8, the specific number is omitted in the blank. In addition, depending on the game state, there are some roles that cannot be drawn by lottery, and the number of the roles is shown as 0. By appropriately determining these numbers, the probability of winning a winning combination can be determined. As described above, when the random number generating means 1122 generates a random number in the range of 0 to 65535, the probability of winning each of the winning combinations can be determined by the number / 65535.

The lottery table corresponds to these game states, the normal general game state lottery table, the first type BB winning general game state lottery table, the second type BB winning general game state lottery table, the RB winning general game state lottery table, It is composed of a lottery table such as an SB game state lottery table, an RB game state lottery table, a first-class BB game state lottery table, a CB game state lottery table, and a second-class BB game state lottery table.

Further, although not shown in the example of FIG. 8, there is also a lottery table for setting the re-game high probability game state. The lottery table is configured separately from the normal game state lottery table and the special game state lottery table.

Each of these lottery tables has, for example, a plurality of regions in which an integer in the range of 0 to 65535 is divided into predetermined ranges. Each of the plurality of areas corresponds to the type of combination. For example, an integer in the range of 0 to 65535 can be used as an area corresponding to a small combination, an area corresponding to a replay combination, an area corresponding to an RB combination, an area corresponding to a first-class BB combination, or an outlier. It is divided into a plurality of areas such as the created area.

An example showing the concept of the lottery table is shown in FIG. 9A. The example shown in FIG. 9A is a normal general game state lottery table, in which integers in the range of 0 to 65535 are divided into predetermined ranges, and each area is divided into a first-class BB combination and a second. It is assigned to the seed BB role, RB role, CB role, SB role, small role, replaying role, duplicate winning combination, and loss. The size of these regions is determined based on the number set in FIG. 8 described above.

The random number determining means 1126 described above determines which of these regions the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means 1124 is included in, and determines the type of combination. For example, when the value of the random number extracted by the random number extraction means 1124 is included in the area corresponding to the first-class BB combination, the random number determination means 1126 determines that the first-class BB combination has been won. Further, when the value of the random number extracted by the random number extraction means 1124 is included in the region corresponding to the deviation, the random number determination means 1126 determines that the deviation is achieved.

As described above, the normal general game state lottery table, the first type BB winning general game state lottery table, the second type BB winning general game state lottery table, the RB winning general game state lottery table, the SB game state lottery table, It is not necessary to provide an area corresponding to all the combinations of all the lottery tables such as the RB game state lottery table, the first type BB game state lottery table, the CB game state lottery table, and the second type BB game state lottery table. It is only necessary to set the area for the winning combination in the game state. For example, when the game state is the RB game state, these combinations are displayed in the RB game state lottery table so that the SB role, the RB role, the first type BB role, the CB role, and the second type BB role are not won. Do not provide an area corresponding to. In addition, when the game state is the first-class BB game state, the first-class BB game state lottery table is set so that the SB role, the first-class BB role, the CB role, and the second-class BB role are not won. Do not provide areas corresponding to these roles. Further, the type 2 BB game state lottery table corresponds to these combinations so that the type 1 BB combination and the type 2 BB combination are not won when the game state is the type 2 BB game state. Do not provide an area.

At least one type of combination is determined by the combination lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120 described above. Such determination of at least one type of combination is referred to as "hit". In addition, the fact that no combination of any kind is determined by the combination lottery process is referred to as "off".

The winning combination by the winning combination lottery process described above is stored as a winning flag. An example of the winning flag is shown in FIG. 9 (b). The winning flag uses 1 bit for one combination, and consists of 16 bits in total. When the winning combination is won, the 1-bit value corresponding to the winning combination is set to "1", and when the winning combination is not won, the value is set to "0".
<Reel drive control means 1130>
The reel drive control means 1130 performs rotation control and stop control of the three reels 1030L to 1030R based on the start signal emitted from the start switch 1042 described above and the stop signal emitted from the stop switches 1044a to 1044c. .. The reel drive control means 1130 includes a reel rotation control means 1132 and a reel stop control means 1134.
<Reel rotation control means 1132>
The reel rotation control means 1132 emits a rotation control signal to the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c based on the detection of the start signal emitted from the operation means 1500, preferably the start switch 1042 described above. The reel rotation control means 1132 does not immediately emit the rotation control signal by detecting the start signal from the start switch 1042, but starts rotation under other conditions, for example, that the weight time has elapsed. It determines that the conditions are satisfied and issues a rotation control signal.

As will be described later, the motor 1086a drives the left reel 1030L, the motor 1086b drives the middle reel 1030C, and the motor 1086c drives the right reel 1030R. Each of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c is composed of a stepping motor, and when a pulse signal consisting of one pulse is supplied, it rotates by a predetermined angle, and when a pulse signal consisting of 504 pulses is supplied, 1 Rotate. When the motor 1086a makes one rotation, the reel 1030L also makes one rotation, when the motor 1086b makes one rotation, the reel 1030C also makes one rotation, and when the motor 1086c makes one rotation, the reel 1030R also makes one rotation.

Based on the detection of the start signal emitted from the start switch 1042, the reel rotation control means 1132 has a pulse signal for the motor 1086a for rotating the motor 1086a and a pulse signal for the motor 1086b for rotating the motor 1086b. And a pulse signal for the motor 1086c for rotating the motor 1086c are generated and supplied to the reel circuit driving means 1136.

The reel circuit driving means 1136 generates a rotation drive signal for the motor 1086a in response to the supplied pulse signal for the motor 1086a, and generates and supplies a rotation drive signal for the motor 1086b in response to the supplied pulse signal for the motor 1086b. A rotation drive signal for the motor 1086c is generated in response to the pulse signal for the motor 1086c, and these rotation drive signals are supplied to each of the motors 1086a, 1086b, and 1086c. The rotation drive signal is a signal for rotating the motors 1086a, 1086b, or 1086c by the rotation position according to the number of pulses of the pulse signal supplied from the reel rotation control means 1132. The motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c start rotation by the rotation drive signal supplied to each of them.

This process is executed in step S1011 shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10 described later.

Further, as will be described later, the pulse signal for the motor 1086a, the pulse signal for the motor 1086b, and the pulse signal for the motor 1086c generated by the reel rotation control means 1132 detect the rotation positions of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. It is also used to do.
<Reel stop control means 1134>
The reel stop control means 1134 stops at the motors 1086a, 1086b or 1086c based on the timing when the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are operated by the player and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination lottery means 1120 described above. A control signal is issued to control the stop of the left reel 1030L, the middle reel 1030C or the right reel 1030R.

As described above, when the stop switch 1044a, 1044b or 1044c is operated by the player, the stop signal is emitted from the stop switch 1044a, 1044b or 1044c. The reel stop control means 1134 detects a stop signal emitted from the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c.

When the reel stop control means 1134 detects a stop signal emitted from the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c, it obtains a candidate symbol described later. As will be described later, this candidate symbol is at least one symbol selected so that it can be positioned at the rotation reference position when the reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R are stopped. It should be noted that the at least one or more symbols are symbols corresponding to the number of control frames described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation reference position is preferably the winning line L3 as described later.

Hereinafter, the number of control frames and the candidate symbols will be described.

The reel stop control means 1134 controls so that the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R rotate to some extent after the stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are operated, and then stop. However, if the time until the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R stop is too long, the mode until the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R stop becomes unnatural. For this reason, in principle, the time from when the stop signals emitted from the stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are detected until the reels stop is set to 190 milliseconds or less. As described in the CB gaming state described above, when the gaming state is changed to the CB gaming state, the stop control of certain reels of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R can be changed. .. Control is performed so that the reel is stopped within 75 milliseconds based on the time when the stop signal emitted from the stop switch corresponding to the fixed reel is detected.

Further, when the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are rotating at a constant speed, it is also necessary for the player to be able to roughly identify the symbols attached to the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R. Therefore, the rotation speeds of the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are determined so that the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R do not rotate more than 80 rotations per minute.

In the case of a general slot machine, the number of symbols attached to each of the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R is 21.

In this way, the first control condition is that the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R with 21 symbols are stopped and controlled so as to stop within 190 milliseconds after the stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are operated. From the second control condition that the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are rotated so as not to rotate more than 80 rotations per minute, the reels 1030L to 1030R are stopped after the stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are operated. The number of symbols that can pass the rotation reference position most (hereinafter referred to as the maximum number of passing symbols) is four. The number of symbols that can pass through the rotation reference position includes symbols that are passing through the rotation reference position when the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are operated.

In the present specification, the sum of the maximum number of passing symbols and the symbols located at the rotation reference position when the reel is stopped is referred to as the number of control frames. As described above, the maximum number of passing symbols is four. Further, the number of symbols located at the rotation reference position when the reel is stopped is one. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of control frames is five. The symbols corresponding to the number of control frames are symbols that may be located at the rotation reference position, and are candidate symbols to be described later.

The reel stop control means 1134 is based on the time when the stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are operated, and then the number of symbols passing through the rotation reference position is equal to or less than the maximum number of passing symbols. Stop control of 1030C and 1030R. The rotation reference position is preferably, for example, the winning line L3. When the rotation reference position is set to the winning line L3, the reels are stopped so that the number of symbols passing through the winning line L3 is equal to or less than the maximum number of passing symbols after the stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are operated. Take control. That is, in the above example, the reel stop control means 1134 has reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R from the time when the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are operated until the number of symbols passing through the winning line L3 becomes four. Is controlled to stop the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R by rotating the reel.

In the present embodiment, the rotation reference position to be used as a reference is preferably any of the winning lines L1 to L3 extending in the horizontal direction. Focusing on one of the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R, the number of symbols passing through the winning lines L1 to L3 from the time the stop switch is operated until the reel stops is determined. The same is true for all winning lines. For example, the number of symbols passing through the winning lines L1 to L3 between the time when the stop switch 1044a is operated and the time when the reel 1030L is stopped is the same in all the winning lines.

Further, the reel stop control means 1134 controls the stop of the left reel 1030L, the middle reel 1030C, or the right reel 1030R based on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination lottery means 1120 described above.

For example, when a predetermined winning combination is won by the lottery process of the winning combination lottery means 1120, the reel stop control means 1134 is easily aligned on the winning line in which the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is activated. The three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are stopped and controlled. That is, if the candidate symbols include a symbol corresponding to the winning combination, the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are arranged so that the symbol is located on the activated winning line. Perform stop control. In this way, performing the stop control of the reels so that the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the winning predetermined combination is aligned on the activated winning line is referred to as "pull-in control".

On the other hand, if none of the winning combinations are won by the lottery process of the winning combination lottery means 1120, that is, if the winning combination is not won, the reel stop control means 1134 is enabled to arrange the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations. Stop control of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R is performed so that they are not aligned on the winning line. That is, stop control of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R is performed so that even if the symbols constituting the candidate symbols are located on the activated winning line, the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations are not arranged. conduct. In this way, performing the stop control of the reels so that the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is not aligned on the activated winning line is referred to as "kicking control".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rotation reference position is set to the lower winning line L3. When a predetermined symbol is positioned on the winning line L3 and the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are stopped, another symbol is positioned on each of the middle winning line L1 and the upper winning line L2. Has been done. That is, the intervals between the three winning lines L1, L2 and L3 are set to approximately match the adjacent intervals of the 21 symbols arranged on each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of winning combinations may be won by the winning combination lottery means 1120. When a plurality of winning combinations are won in duplicate, the priority order for stopping control of the three reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R is predetermined according to the type of the winning combination.

The winning of the winning combination when the duplicate winning is won is controlled as follows. First, when the duplicate winning combination includes a replaying combination, even if the other overlapping winning combination is a special role, the three reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R so that the replaying combination wins. Execute stop control. If the winning combination includes a special combination and at least one small combination, the stop control is executed with priority given to the special combination over the small combination.

Even if the winning combination is duplicated, only one winning combination can be finally won, but in the process of stopping and controlling the three reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R, a plurality of winning combination among the winning combination Try to win as much as possible. Such stop control may be possible depending on how the symbols attached to the three reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R are arranged and the timing at which the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are operated.

For example, when a small combination and a special combination are won in duplicate, three reels 1030L, 1030C or three reels 1030L, 1030C or Stop control of 1030R is performed. Stop control is performed on each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R. In the following, the stop control of the reel to be stopped first (hereinafter referred to as the first stop), the stop control of the reel to be stopped second (hereinafter referred to as the second stop), and the last stop (hereinafter referred to as the second stop). , Referred to as a third stop.) Reel stop control will be described.

First, in the first stop, stop control is performed so that both the symbol corresponding to the small combination and the symbol corresponding to the special combination are positioned as close to one of the effective lines as possible. When it is not possible to position both the symbol corresponding to the small combination and the symbol corresponding to the special combination on the effective line, priority is given to the special combination and stop control is performed so that the symbol corresponding to the special combination is located on the effective line. conduct. In this case, the second stop and the third stop perform stop control so that the symbol corresponding to the special combination is located on the effective line.

On the other hand, when the special combination cannot be prioritized in the first stop, the stop control is performed so that the symbol corresponding to the small combination is located on the effective line, and the symbol corresponding to the small combination is also effective in the second stop and the third stop. Stop control is performed so that it is located on the line.

In addition, when both the symbol corresponding to the small combination and the symbol corresponding to the special combination can be positioned on the effective line by the stop control of the first stop, the small combination and the special combination are also used in the second stop. Stop control is performed so that there is a possibility of winning both sides. When the stop control cannot be performed so that there is a possibility that both the small combination and the special combination will be won, the stop control is performed with priority given to the special combination as in the first stop.

Further, when the stop control can be performed so that there is a possibility that both the small winning combination and the special winning combination will be won in the second stop, the stopping control is performed with priority given to the special winning combination in the third stop. When it is not possible to win a special role, stop control is performed so that a small role is won.

By performing the stop control as described above, if the special role and the small role are won more than once, the possibility of winning both the special role and the small role is left as much as possible, and finally, the special role is finally won. Try to win one of the two roles, the small role and the small role. In the above-mentioned example, the case where the special combination and the small combination are duplicated is shown, but even when the other combination is duplicated, the same stop control is performed according to a predetermined priority.

The process in the reel stop control means 1134 described above is executed in the reel stop control process of FIG. 12 called in the process of step S1012 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 10 to be described later.
<Reel rotation position acquisition means 1140>
The reel rotation position acquisition means 1140 acquires the rotation positions of the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R. As described above, the reel rotation control means 1132 supplies a pulse signal to the reel circuit drive means 1136 for driving each of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c. The reel circuit drive means 1136 is a rotation drive signal for the motor 1086a and a motor so that the motors 1086a, 1086b or 1086c rotate by the rotation position according to the number of pulses included in the pulse signal supplied from the reel rotation control means 1132. A rotation drive signal for 1086b and a rotation drive signal for motor 1086c are generated and supplied to each of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c. Therefore, the rotation positions of the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R can be acquired by counting the number of pulses included in the pulse signal supplied to the reel circuit driving means 1136. As described above, by supplying the pulse signal composed of 504 pulses to the reel circuit driving means 1136, each of the motors 1086a, 1086b, and 1086c can be rotated once. When the motors 1086a, 1086b, and 1086c make one rotation, each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R can also make one rotation.

Further, as described above, the index signals emitted from the rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, and 1083c are supplied to the main control means 1100. Each time the reel rotation position acquisition means 1140 receives an index signal, the number of counted pulses is initialized, for example, set to 0. By doing so, the number of pulses counted each time each of the motors 1086a, 1086b, and 1086c makes one rotation can be initialized. In this way, since the number of counted pulses is initialized each time one rotation is performed, the rotation positions of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R can be obtained depending on the number of counted pulses. In addition, by initializing the number of pulses counted for each rotation, even if a problem such as step-out occurs while the motors 1086a, 1086b, 1086c are rotating, the number of pulses is immediately corrected to an accurate number. can do.

It is preferable that the index signal emitted from the rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, 1083c is emitted when the symbol of symbol number 0 is located at a predetermined rotation reference position, for example, the winning line L3. As described above, a detection protruding piece (not shown) is attached to one of the spoke portions of each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. Therefore, it is preferable to attach the detection protrusion so that the index signal is emitted when the symbol of symbol number 0 is located on the winning line L3.

By doing so, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 6, in the case of the left reel 1030L, the index signal is emitted when the symbol "lever" of symbol number 0 is located on the winning line L3. Further, in the case of the middle reel 1030C, an index signal is emitted when the symbol "RP" having the symbol number 0 is located on the winning line L3. Further, in the case of the right reel 1030R, the index signal is emitted when the symbol "bell" having the symbol number 0 is located on the winning line L3.

The counted number of pulses is stored in the pulse number storage means 1142 of the reel rotation position acquisition means 1140 for each of the left reel 1030L, the middle reel 1030C, and the right reel 1030R. Each time the reel rotation position acquisition means 1140 counts the number of pulses, the counted number of pulses is stored in the pulse number storage means 1142 and updated, so that the number of pulses stored in the pulse number storage means 1142 is read out. By doing so, the latest number of pulses can be obtained.

Furthermore, the symbol number can be calculated from the number of counted pulses. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 6, if the number of counted pulses is 0 when the left reel 1030L is stopped, it means that the symbol with symbol number 0 is located on the winning line L3. If the number of counted pulses is 24, it indicates that the symbol of symbol number 1 is located on the winning line L3, and if the number of counted pulses is 48, the symbol of symbol number 2 is the winning line. Indicates that it is located at L3. Further, if the number of counted pulses is 192 when the middle reel 1030C is stopped, it indicates that the symbol of symbol number 8 is located on the winning line L3, and the number of counted pulses is 216. If there is, it indicates that the symbol of symbol number 9 is located on the winning line L3, and if the number of counted pulses is 240, it indicates that the symbol of symbol number 10 is located on the winning line L3. The same applies to the right reel 1030R.

In this way, for each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R, which of the 21 symbols of symbol numbers 0 to 20 is located on the winning line L3 is acquired by the number of counted pulses. can do.

Similarly, when the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are rotating, the symbol number can be obtained from the number of counted pulses. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 6, when the number of the counted pulses is 492 to 12 when the left reel 1030L is rotating, the symbol of symbol number 0 moves and passes through the winning line L3. If the number of counted pulses is 276 to 300, it indicates that the symbol of symbol number 12 is moving and passing through the winning line L3. The same applies to the middle reel 1030C and the right reel 1030R.

In this way, for the left reel 1030L, the middle reel 1030C, and the right reel 1030R, depending on the number of pulses counted, the symbol number located on the winning line L3 or the symbol number in the middle of passing through the winning line L3. Can be obtained.

The acquired symbol numbers are stored in the symbol number storage means 1144 of the reel rotation position acquisition means 1140 for each of the left reel 1030L, the middle reel 1030C, and the right reel 1030R. Since the symbol number is stored and updated in the symbol number storage means 1144 each time the symbol number is also increased, the latest symbol number can be obtained by reading the symbol number stored in the symbol number storage means 1144.

The correspondence relationship between the symbol number and the symbol for each of the middle reel 1030C and the right reel 1030R shown in FIG. 6 is stored in the symbol number-symbol correspondence relationship storage means 1146. The table shown in FIG. 6 schematically shows the symbols so that they can be visually recognized. However, the correspondence between the symbol numbers and the symbols stored in the symbol number-symbol correspondence storage means 1146 shows the symbols. Numerical data for identification is stored as a table.

By reading out the symbol number stored in the symbol number storage means 1144 and referring to the correspondence relationship stored in the symbol number-symbol correspondence storage means 1146, the left reel 1030L, the middle reel 1030C, and the symbol number are read. For each of the right reels 1030R, it is possible to acquire a symbol located on the winning line L3 and a symbol being passed through the winning line L3. For example, in the case of the left reel 1030L, when the number of counted pulses is 384 steps, the symbol number is 16, and by referring to the correspondence between the symbol number and the symbol, the symbol is "watermelon". Is. Therefore, it can be acquired that the symbol located on the winning line L3 is "watermelon".

As described above, since the symbol number stored in the symbol number storage means 1144 is updated at any time, it is stored in the symbol number storage means 1144 even when each of the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R is rotating. By reading out the symbol number, it is possible to acquire the symbol that is passing through the winning line L3, which is the rotation reference position. Further, the rotation reference position is obtained by acquiring the symbol in the middle of passing through the winning line L3 which is the rotation reference position and referring to the correspondence stored in the symbol number-symbol correspondence storage means 1146. It is also possible to acquire a symbol that may be located on the winning line L3. As described above, the symbol that may be located at the rotation reference position is a candidate symbol, and is a symbol that may be located at the rotation reference position when the reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R are stopped. Even when the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are stopped, by reading the symbol number stored in the symbol number storage means 1144, it is possible to acquire the symbol that is stopped and located at the rotation reference position. ..

The acquisition of the above-mentioned candidate symbol is performed as follows.

When the stop switch is operated, the symbol number stored in the symbol number storage means 1144 is read out, and the read symbol number is referred to the correspondence relationship stored in the symbol number-symbol correspondence storage means 1146. , Rotation reference position, for example, a symbol in the middle of passing through the winning line L3 can be obtained. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of control frames is the sum of the maximum number of passing symbols and the symbols located at the rotation reference position when the reel is stopped. After obtaining the symbol that is passing through the rotation reference position, the symbol corresponding to the number of control frames can also be obtained by referring to the symbol number-symbol correspondence relationship. As described above, in the present specification, the symbols corresponding to the number of control frames are referred to as candidate symbols. The reel stop control means 1134 obtains the candidate symbols as described above and starts the reel stop control corresponding to the operated stop switch. The acquired candidate symbols are referred to when the reel stop control means 1134 described above performs pull-in control or kick-off control.

As described above, the position of the candidate symbol with respect to the rotation reference position can be determined by acquiring the candidate symbol. That is, how far the predetermined symbol included in the candidate symbol is from the rotation reference position, that is, how many frames the predetermined symbol included in the candidate symbol is separated from the rotation reference position. You can decide if you are there.

Further, as described above, when the reels 1030L, 1030C or 1030R are already stopped, a symbol located at the rotation reference position, for example, the winning line L3 can be acquired. This process can be performed by reading out the symbol number stored in the symbol number storage means 1144. For a reel that has already stopped, acquisition of a symbol located at a rotation reference position is also required when performing a winning process or when the reel stop control means 1134 described above performs pull-in control or kicking control.

In the winning process, it is necessary to acquire the arrangement of the symbols arranged in the activated winning line. In this case, first, the symbol located on the winning line L3, which is the rotation reference position, is also acquired, and the correspondence is valid by referring to the correspondence stored in the symbol number-symbol correspondence storage means 1146 from the symbol. Acquire the symbols lined up in the converted winning line.

Further, in the case of pull-in control or kicking control, when a predetermined combination is won by the lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120, the reel stop control means 1134 has a symbol of a reel that has already stopped and a stop from now on. From the candidate symbols of the reel to be tried, the stop control of the reel to be stopped is performed so that the sequence of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is lined up on the activated winning line. Further, when none of the winning combinations is won by the lottery process of the winning combination lottery means 1120, the reel stop control means 1134 determines the symbol of the reel that has already stopped and the candidate symbol of the reel that is about to stop. Therefore, the stop control of the reel to be stopped is performed so that the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is not aligned on the activated winning line.

The acquisition of the above-mentioned symbol is also referred to when the reel stop control process of step S1012 of FIG. 10 is performed and the winning process of step S1013 of FIG.
<Effective line storage means 1160>
As described above, any one of the five winning lines L1 to L5 is activated by the game medium number setting means 1600 (effective line forming means). The effective line storage means 1160 stores the winning line activated by the game medium number setting means 1600 (effective line making means) as an effective line.

For example, when the player operates the 1-bet switch 1062, the winning line L1 is activated, and the effective line storage means 1160 stores the winning line L1 as an effective line. When the 2-bet switch 1064 is operated, the winning lines L1 to L3 are activated, and the effective line storage means 1160 stores the winning lines L1 to L5 as effective lines. When the maximum bet switch 1066 is operated, L1 to L5 are activated, and the effective line storage means 1160 stores the winning lines L1 to L5 as effective lines.
<Set value storage means 1170>
The set value storage means 1170 stores the set value indicated by the signal emitted from the set value setting means 1700. For example, when the set value is 1 to 6, the set value storage means 1170 stores any value of 1 to 6. The set value stored in the set value storage means 1170 is read out when the lottery table stored in the lottery table storage means 1128 is selected.

Further, the set value stored in the set value storage means 1170 is transmitted to the sub control means 1200 described later at a predetermined timing.
<Design display means 1400>
The symbol display means 1400 includes three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R. In the present embodiment, as described above, a predetermined number, for example, 21 symbols are arranged in each of the reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R along the rotation direction of the reels. The symbol display means 1400 preferably includes the reel unit 1028 described above.

The reel 1030L includes a motor 1086a for rotationally driving the reel 1030L and a rotational position sensor 1083a for detecting the rotational position of the reel 1030L. The reel 1030C includes a motor 1086b for rotationally driving the reel 1030C and a rotational position sensor 1083b for detecting the rotational position of the reel 1030C. The reel 1030R includes a motor 1086c for rotationally driving the reel 1030R and a rotational position sensor 1083c for detecting the rotational position of the reel 1030R. In the present embodiment, the central portions of the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are connected to the rotation shafts of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c, and the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c make one rotation to rotate the reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030C. The 1030R is also configured to make one rotation.

In this embodiment, each of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c comprises a stepping motor. Reel circuit driving means 1136 (see FIG. 7) for driving the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c is electrically connected to each of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c. The reel circuit drive means 1136 is electrically connected to the main control means 1100.

As described above, when the pulse signal is supplied from the reel rotation control means 1132, the reel circuit drive means 1136 is based on the supplied pulse signal, the rotation drive signal for the motor 1086a, the rotation drive signal for the motor 1086b, and the motor. A rotation drive signal for 1086c is generated and emitted to each of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c. The reel circuit drive means 1136 rotates the rotation drive signal for the motor 1086a and the rotation for the motor 1086b so that the motors 1086a, 1086b or 1086c rotate by the rotation position according to the number of pulses of the pulse signal supplied from the main control means 1100. A drive signal and a rotation drive signal for the motor 1086c are generated. In the present embodiment, one rotation of the motors 1086a, 1086b or 1086c, that is, 360 degrees is divided into 504 steps equally. That is, when a pulse signal consisting of 504 pulses from the main control means 1100 is supplied to the reel circuit drive means 1136, the reel circuit drive means 1136 causes the motor 1086a to make one rotation of the motor 1086a, 1086b or 1086c. Rotation drive signal, rotation drive signal for motor 1086b, and rotation drive signal for motor 1086c are generated.

The reel rotation position acquisition means 1140 of the main control means 1100 counts the number of pulses included in the pulse signal supplied from the reel rotation control means 1132 to the reel circuit drive means 1136. By counting the number of the pulses, the rotational position of the motor 1086a, 1086b or 1086c can be obtained.

As described above, the rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b and 1083c emit an index signal consisting of one pulse each time each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R makes one rotation. The rotation position where the pulse is generated can be the origin of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R. The rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, 1083c are electrically connected to the main control means 1100, and the pulse signals emitted from the rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, 1083c are supplied to the main control means 1100. The main control means 1100 can determine when each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, 1030R is located at the origin by detecting when a pulse signal is emitted from the rotation position sensors 1083a, 1083b, 1083c. .. The reel rotation position acquisition unit 1140 described above initializes the counted number of pulses each time it receives an index signal, for example, sets it to 0.
<Sub control means 1200 (effect control means)>
As described above, the sub control means 1200 is electrically connected to the main control means 1100, and various information emitted from the main control means 1100 is supplied to the sub control means 1200.

Various types of information emitted from the main control means 1100 include information indicating the lottery result of the lottery process performed by the combination lottery means 1120, stop information indicating that the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c have been operated, and the like. This information is transmitted from the main control means 1100 in a process such as step S1007 of the flowchart of FIG. 11 or S1202 of the flowchart of FIG. 12, which will be described later.

The sub-control means 1200 receives these information and controls the effect performed by the effect means 1300, which will be described later.

The sub-control means 1200 preferably comprises the above-mentioned sub-control board 1052. The sub-control means 1200 includes an information transmitting means 1270 and an effect lottery table storage means 1280.
<Information transmission means 1270>
The information transmitting means 1270 transmits information about the effect to the effect means 1300. When it is determined by the effect determining means (not shown) that the effect is to be performed, information about the effect performed by the effect means 1300, such as image data, is transmitted to the effect means 1300. On the other hand, when it is decided not to produce the effect, the information about the effect is not transmitted to the effect means 1300.
<Direction lottery table storage means 1280>
The effect lottery table storage means 1280 stores an effect lottery table determined in response to the designated information.
<Direction means 1300>
In the effect means 1300, information about the game is notified as an effect. In the present embodiment, the effect for notifying the information about the unit game is performed by the effect means 1300.

The effect means 1300 is electrically connected to the information transmission means 1270 of the sub control means 1200 described above. The effect means 1300 notifies the player so that the information emitted from the information transmission means 1270 can be recognized by the player. The effect means 1300 preferably comprises an image display device 1034, a speaker 1036, or a lamp 1038. The game for notifying the above-mentioned information about the game is preferably performed by the image display device 1034. As described above, the effect is controlled and advanced by the sub control means 1200.
<< Control processing >>
The control performed by the main control means 1100 (main control board 1032) and the sub control means 1200 (sub control board 1052) of the slot machine 1010 described above will be described below. 10 to 15 are subroutines for executing the control process in the main control means 1100. Further, FIG. 16 is a subroutine for executing the control process in the sub control means 1200. As will be described later, the sub-control means 1200 also executes the control process in the gaming machine system 10.

In the following, the slot machine 1010 has been started in advance, and in the above-mentioned main control means 1100, the slot machine 1010 is in steady operation after the start processing such as the initialization of various variables used for control is completed. And. Further, the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 10 to 15 and 16 show only one example for executing the control processing in the main control means 1100 and the sub control means 1200, and are limited to this processing procedure. do not have.
<Control in the main control means 1100>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing control by the main control means 1100.

First, it is determined whether or not the unit game to be performed this time is a re-game (step S1001). Whether or not the unit game to be performed this time is to be replayed is determined by the process of step S1307 of FIG. 13, which will be described later. The process of step S1307 of FIG. 13 is the process of the unit game performed last time. The re-game is a unit game in which a predetermined number of medals can be played without betting while maintaining the number of bets in the previously played unit game.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1001 that the unit game to be performed this time is not a re-game (NO), the player operates the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064, or the maximum bet switch 1066 described above. The number of inserted sheets is determined based on the bet instruction signal (step S1002). This number of inserts indicates the number of medals to bet for one unit game, and is not only the number of medals to bet after being temporarily accumulated as the number of credits described above. , Also includes the number of medals inserted from the medal slot 1046 and directly bet.

As described above, the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064 or the maximum bet switch 1066 also has a function of activating the winning line, and when the player operates the 1-bet switch 1062, the winning line L1 is set. It will be activated. When the 2-bet switch 1064 is operated, the winning lines L1 to L3 are activated. When the maximum bet switch 1066 is operated, L1 to L5 are activated.

Information indicating the set value set by the set value setting means 1700 when the unit game to be performed this time is determined to be a re-game (YES) in the determination process of step S1001 described above, or when the process of step S1002 is executed. (Hereinafter referred to as set value information) is transmitted to the sub control means 1200 (step S1003).

Next, it is determined whether or not the start switch 1042 has been operated by the player (step S1004). This determination process is determined by whether or not a start signal is emitted from the start switch 1042. When it is determined that the start switch 1042 is not operated (NO), the determination process of step S1004 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 1042 has been operated by the player (YES), information indicating the game state (hereinafter referred to as game state information) is transmitted to the sub control means 1200 (step S1005), which will be described later. The combination lottery process by the combination lottery means 1120 shown in FIG. 11 is called and executed (step S1006), and the information indicating the result of the combination lottery process by the combination lottery means 1120 (hereinafter, referred to as lottery result information) is the sub-control means. It is transmitted to 1200 (step S1007).

Next, it is determined whether or not to weight (step S1008). The weight is to make the player stand by to prevent the player from consuming a large number of game medals in a short time, and to make the time required for one unit game be a predetermined time, for example, 4.1 seconds or more. be. When it is determined in the determination process of step S1008 that the weight is to be applied (YES), it is determined whether or not the timer value of the weight timer activated in step S1010 described later has exceeded a predetermined value, and whether or not the weight is terminated. (Step S1009). The process of step S1010 was executed in the previous unit game. When it is determined in the determination process of step S1009 that the weight is not terminated (NO), the process of step S1009 is repeated.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1008 that no weight is to be applied (NO), or when it is determined in the determination process of step S1009 that the weight is to be terminated (YES), the timer for the weight is activated (step S1010). ). The timer value of the timer for the weight activated in the process of step S1010 is used in the determination process of step S1009 described above in the unit game to be performed next.

Next, the reel rotation control means 1132 of the reel drive control means 1130 described above starts rotation control of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R (step S1011). Further, the stop control subroutine shown in FIG. 11 to be described later is called, and the reel stop control means 1134 of the reel drive control means 1130 executes the stop control of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R (step S1012).

After executing the process of step S1012, the subroutine of the winning process shown in FIG. 12 to be described later is called to execute the winning process of the unit game performed this time (step S1013), and this subroutine is terminated.
<Role lottery process>
FIG. 11 shows a subroutine of the winning combination lottery process that is called and executed in step S1006 of the subroutine of FIG. 10 described above. This process is a process executed by the winning combination lottery means 1120 described above. The gaming state described below is stored as a flag value, and the gaming state can be obtained by reading the flag value. The value of the flag is changed and stored by the process of step S1122 of FIG. 11, which will be described later.

First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S1101). As described above, the normal gaming state includes a normal general gaming state, a first-class BB winning general gaming state, a second-class BB winning general gaming state, and an RB winning general gaming state. When it is determined in the determination process of step S1101 that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (YES), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the first-class BB winning general gaming state (step S1102). When it is determined that the gaming state is the first-class BB winning general gaming state (YES), the first-class BB winning gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1103).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1102 that the gaming state is not the first-class BB winning general gaming state (NO), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the second-class BB winning general gaming state. (Step S1104). When it is determined that the gaming state is the second-class BB winning general gaming state (YES), the second-class BB winning gaming status lottery table is selected (step S1105).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1104 that the gaming state is not the type 2 BB winning general gaming state (NO), it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the RB winning general gaming state (step S1106). ). When it is determined that the gaming state is the RB winning general gaming state (YES), the RB winning gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1107).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1106 that the gaming state is not the RB winning general gaming state (NO), the normal general gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1108).

When it is determined (NO) in the determination process of step S1101 described above that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the first-class BB gaming state (step S1109). As described above, the special gaming state includes a first-class BB gaming state, a second-class BB gaming state, an RB gaming state, an SB gaming state, and a CB gaming state, as will be described later. When it is determined in the determination process of step S1109 that the gaming state is the first-class BB gaming state, the first-class BB gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1110).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1109 described above that the gaming state is not the first-class BB gaming state, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the second-class BB gaming state (step S1111). When it is determined that the gaming state is the type 2 BB gaming state (YES), the type 2 BB gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1112).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1111 described above that the gaming state is not the type 2 BB gaming state, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the RB gaming state (step S1113). When it is determined that the gaming state is the RB gaming state (YES), the RB gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1114).

After executing the processes of steps S1103, S1105, S1107, S1108, S1110, S1112 or S1114 described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the RT gaming state (step S1115). When it is determined that the gaming state is the RT gaming state (YES), the RT gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1116). As described above, the RT gaming state is not an independent gaming state such as a normal gaming state or a special gaming state, but a gaming state that can be superimposed on these gaming states, and the processing of steps S1101 to S1114 is performed. After the execution, it is determined again whether or not the gaming state is the RT gaming state by the determination process of step S1115. As described above, in the above-described example, the RT gaming state is independently determined in step S1115, but in combination with the processing of steps S1101 to S1114 described above, it is determined whether or not the RT gaming state is in the RT gaming state. You may.

When it is determined (NO) that the gaming state is not the RB gaming state in the determination process of step S1113 described above, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the SB gaming state (step S1117). When it is determined that the gaming state is the SB gaming state (YES), the SB gaming state lottery table is selected (step S1118), and when it is determined that the gaming state is not the SB gaming state (YES), The CB game state lottery table is selected (step S1119).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1115 described above that the gaming state is not the RT gaming state (NO), or when the process of steps S1116, S1118 or S1119 is executed, a random number is extracted by the random number extracting means 1124 described above. (Step S1120). The random number determination means 1126 uses the data of the lottery table selected in each process of steps S1103, S1105, S1107, S1108, S1110, S1112, S1114, S1116, S1118 or S1119 and the value of the random number extracted in the process of step S1120. By collating, the type of combination is determined (step S1121). The value of the winning flag is set according to the type of combination determined in step S1121 (step S1122), and this subroutine is terminated.
<Reel stop control process>
FIG. 12 shows a subroutine of reel stop control processing that is called and executed in step S1012 of the subroutine of FIG. 10 described above.

First, it is determined whether or not the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c have been operated by the player (step S1201). This determination process is determined based on whether or not a stop signal is emitted from the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c. When it is determined that the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are not operated (NO), the determination process of step S1201 is repeated.

On the other hand, when it is determined (YES) that the stop switch 1044a, 1044b or 1044c has been operated by the player, information indicating that the stop switch 1044a, 1044b or 1044c has been operated (hereinafter, referred to as stop information). Is transmitted to the sub control means 1200 (step S1202). The stop information includes information for identifying the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch among the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c. For example, when the stop switch 1044a is operated by the player and the stop information is transmitted, it is information for identifying the reel 1030L, and when the stop switch 1044b is operated by the player and the stop information is transmitted, the reel. This is information that identifies the reel 1030C, and is information that identifies the reel 1030R when the stop switch 1044c is operated by the player and the stop information is transmitted.

The stop information also includes a symbol number indicating a symbol located at the rotation reference position when the stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are operated. The symbol located at the rotation reference position is, for example, a symbol moving directly above the winning line L3. The symbol numbers are numbers 0 to 20 (see FIG. 6) for identifying the 21 symbols attached to each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. In the process of step S1202, the stop information is transmitted to the sub control means 1200 each time the stop switch 1044a, 1044b or 1044c is operated. By doing so, the sub-control means 1200 can obtain the order in which the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are operated.

Next, in the winning combination lottery process of step S1006 of FIG. 10 described above, it is determined whether or not the winning combination has been won (step S1203). When it is determined that the winning combination has been won, it is determined whether or not the symbol corresponding to the winning combination can be drawn into any of the activated winning lines (step S1204). This determination can be made by reading out the symbol number stored in the symbol number storage means 1144 described above. When it is determined that the symbol corresponding to the winning combination can be drawn into one of the activated winning lines, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is stopped at the activated winning line so that the arrangement of the symbols is aligned. To determine the reel pull-in control stop position (step S1205).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1203 described above that the winning combination has not been won, or in the determination process of step S1204, the symbol corresponding to the winning combination cannot be drawn into any of the activated winning lines. When it is determined that, the symbols to be stopped at the activated winning line are determined so that the arrangement of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not aligned, and the stop position for kicking control of the reel is determined (step S1206).

After executing the process of step S1205 or S1206, the reel stop control means 1134 of the reel drive control means 1130 so as to reach the pull-in control stop position determined in step S1205 or the kicking control stop position determined in step S1206. Stop control of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R is executed (step S1207). The stop control of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R is such that the motor 1086a for driving the reel 1030L, the motor 1086b for driving the reel 1030C, and the motor 1086c for driving the reel 1030R are of these motors. It can be stopped by exciting each and every phase. For example, when each of the motors 1086a, 1086b and 1086c is driven by three-phase excitation, the motor can be stopped by simultaneously exciting all three phases of each motor. The pull-in control can be performed by executing the processes of steps S1203, S1204 and S1205 described above. On the other hand, kicking control can be performed by executing the processes of steps S1203, S1204 and S1206.

After executing the process of step S1207 described above, the symbol number of the symbol stopped in the activated winning line is stored in the symbol number storage means 1144 (step S1208), and all of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R. Determines whether or not has stopped (step S1209). As described above, the motor 1086a for driving the reel 1030L, the motor 1086b for driving the reel 1030C, and the motor 1086c for driving the reel 1030R excite all phases of each of these motors. By doing so, it can be stopped. The determination process in step S1209 is a process for determining whether or not the excitation control for stopping such a motor has been performed on all of the three motors 1086a, 1086b, and 1086c.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1209 described above that all three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R are not stopped, that is, at least one of the three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R is stopped. When it is determined that there is no such thing (NO), the process is returned to step S1201 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that all three reels 1030L, 1030C and 1030R have stopped (YES), this subroutine is immediately terminated.
<Prize processing>
FIG. 13 shows a subroutine of reel stop control processing that is called and executed in step S1013 of the subroutine of FIG. 10 described above.

First, the value of the variable C_ALL_game is incremented by 1 (step S1301). The variable C_ALL_game is a variable that is initialized when the slot machine 1010 is started or initialized, and is a variable that stores the number of unit games played so far.

Next, the value of the variable C_spec_game is increased by 1 (step S1302). This variable C_spec_game is a variable that is initialized when the game state is changed, and is a variable that stores the number of unit games played in one game state. This variable C_spec_game can be used to determine whether or not the end condition of the game state is satisfied.

Next, the symbol stopped at the activated winning line (hereinafter, referred to as a stopped symbol) is read out (step S1303). This stop symbol is stored in step S1208 of FIG. 12 described above. By reading out this stop symbol, it is possible to determine whether or not the winning combination has been won.

From the stop symbol read in the process of step S1303, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been won (step S1304). When it is determined that the small winning combination has been won (YES), the medal payout process is executed (step S1305). The process of step S1305 executes a process of paying out the number of medals according to the winning small winning combination and a process of counting the paid out medals. The counting of medals is performed according to the gaming state, and can be used to determine whether or not the ending condition of the gaming state is satisfied.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1304 that the small winning combination has not been won (NO), it is determined whether or not the player has won the replaying combination (step S1306). When it is determined that the player has won the re-game combination (YES), the re-game flag is set (step S1307). By setting the replay flag in step S1307, it is possible to determine whether or not to replay the game in the determination process of step S1001 of FIG. 10 described above.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1306 that the player has not won the re-game combination (NO), it is determined whether or not the player has won the first-class BB combination (step S1308). When it is determined that the player has won the first-class BB combination (YES), the first-class BB game flag is set (step S1309).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1308 that the first-class BB combination has not been won (NO), it is determined whether or not the second-class BB combination has been won (step S1310). When it is determined that the player has won the second-class BB combination (YES), the second-class BB game flag is set (step S1311).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1310 that the second type BB combination has not been won (NO), it is determined whether or not the RB combination has been won (step S1312). When it is determined that the RB combination has been won (YES), the RB game flag is set (step S1313).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1312 that the RB combination has not been won (NO), it is determined whether or not the SB combination has been won (step S1314). When it is determined that the SB combination has been won (YES), the SB game flag is set (step S1315).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1314 that the SB combination has not been won (NO), it is determined whether or not the CB combination has been won (step S1316). When it is determined that the CB combination has been won (YES), the CB game flag is set (step S1317).

After executing the processes of steps S1305, S1307, S1309, S1311, S1313, S1315 or S1317 described above, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the RT gaming state is satisfied (step S1318). The conditions for starting this RT gaming state are when the first type BB combination, the second type BB combination, and the RB combination are won, or the above-mentioned first type BB gaming state, second type BB gaming state, and RB gaming state. When the game state has changed, when the type 1 BB game state, the type 2 BB game state, or the RB game state has ended, or when the type 1 BB role, the type 2 BB role, or the RB role has not been won. In some cases, or when the player is not in the first-class BB game state, the second-class BB game state, or the RB game state, a specific pattern is arranged. When it is determined that the condition for starting the RT game state is satisfied (YES), the RT game flag is set (step S1319). When it is determined in the determination process of step S1318 that the condition for starting the RT gaming state is not satisfied (NO), or when the process of step S1319 is executed, the above-mentioned S1305, S1307, S1309, S1311, S1313, S1315 or By executing the process of S1317, it is determined whether or not the flag is set (step S1320). When it is determined that the flag has been set (YES), the value of the variable C_spec_game is initialized, for example, set to 0 (step S1321).

When it is determined (NO) that the flag is not set in the determination process of step S1320 described above, or when the process of step S1321 is executed, the winning information indicating the type of winning combination is transmitted to the sub control means 1200. (Step S1322) ends this subroutine (see FIG. 14 described later). The above-mentioned winning information also includes information indicating the arrangement of symbols stopped on the valid winning line.

When it is determined (NO) in the determination process of step S1316 described above that the CB combination has not been won, the process is transferred to step S1401 of FIG. 14 described later, and the condition for ending the first-class BB game state is satisfied. It is determined whether or not (step S1401).

When it is determined (YES) that the condition for ending the first-class BB game state is satisfied, the first-class BB game flag is cleared (step S1402).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1401 that the condition for ending the first-class BB gaming state is not satisfied (NO), it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the second-class BB gaming state is satisfied (NO). Step S1403). When it is determined (YES) that the condition for ending the type 2 BB game state is satisfied, the type 2 BB game flag is cleared (step S1404).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1403 that the condition for ending the second type BB gaming state is not satisfied (NO), it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the RB gaming state is satisfied (step S1405). .. When it is determined that the condition for ending the RB game state is satisfied (YES), the RB game flag is cleared (step S1406).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1405 that the condition for ending the RB gaming state is not satisfied (NO), it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the SB gaming state is satisfied (step S1407). When it is determined that the condition for ending the SB game state is satisfied (YES), the SB game flag is cleared (step S1408).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1407 that the condition for ending the SB gaming state is not satisfied (NO), it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the CB gaming state is satisfied (step S1409). When it is determined that the condition for ending the CB game state is satisfied (YES), the CB game flag is cleared (step S1410).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S1409 that the condition for ending the CB gaming state is not satisfied (NO), it is determined whether or not the condition for ending the RT gaming state is satisfied (step S1411). When it is determined that the condition for ending the RT game state is satisfied (YES), the RT game flag is cleared (step S1412).

When the processing of steps S1402, S1404, S1406, S1408, S1410 or S1412 described above is executed, or when it is determined in the determination processing of step S1411 that the condition for ending the RT gaming state is not satisfied (NO), The end information indicating the type of the completed game state is transmitted to the sub-control means 1200 (step S1413), and the present subroutine is terminated.
<Settlement button operation processing>
FIG. 15 shows a subroutine of processing executed when the player operates the settlement button 1054. This subroutine is a subroutine that is called and executed at predetermined timings.

First, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 1054 has been operated by the player (step S1501). When it is determined (NO) that the settlement button 1054 has not been operated by the player, the subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the settlement button 1054 has been operated by the player (YES), it is determined whether or not there is a medal to be paid out (step S1502). When it is determined that there is a medal to be paid out (YES), the medal is paid out to the saucer 1048 (step S1503), and this subroutine is terminated. By executing the process of step S1503, a normal medal payout process can be executed.

When it is determined that there is no medal to be paid out (NO), the settlement information is transmitted to the sub-control means 1200 (step S1504). The settlement information is information indicating that the settlement button 1054 has been operated by the player.

Next, it is determined whether or not the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064, or the maximum bet switch 1066 has been operated by the player (step S1505). When it is determined by the player that the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064 or the maximum bet switch 1066 has been operated (YES), the bet operation information is transmitted to the sub-control means 1200 (step S1506), and this subroutine is executed. finish. This bet operation information is information indicating that the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064 or the maximum bet switch 1066 has been operated by the player, and also indicates the operated bet switch.

On the other hand, when the player determines that the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064 or the maximum bet switch 1066 is not operated (NO), the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are set by the player. It is determined whether or not the operation has been performed (step S1507). When it is determined (NO) that the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are not operated by the player, the process is returned to step S1505 described above.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are not operated by the player (NO), the stop information is transmitted to the sub control means 1200 (step S1508), and this subroutine is terminated. do. This stop information is information indicating that the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c have been operated by the player, and also indicate the operated stop switches.

By executing this process, the checkout button 1054 was operated by the player, the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064 or the maximum bet switch 1066 was operated by the player, and the three stop switches. It is possible to inform the sub-control means 1200 that the 1044a, 1044b or 1044c has been operated by the player.
<< Sub-control side processing >>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a control program executed by the sub control means 1200.
<Information reception processing>
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an outline of a subroutine for processing information received from the main control means 1100 in the sub control means 1200. This subroutine is called and executed at predetermined timings, for example, by interrupt processing or the like.

First, it is determined whether or not information has been received from the main control means 1100 (step S1601). When it is determined that no information has been received from the main control means 1100 (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the information has not been received from the main control means 1100 (YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the flag F_adjustment is 1 (step S1620). The flag F_adjustment is a flag indicating whether or not the settlement information transmitted from the main control means 1100 has been received. The value is 1 when the settlement information is received, and the value is 0 when the settlement information is not received. Is.

When it is determined (YES) that the value of the flag F_adjustment is 1 in the determination process of step S1620, it is determined whether or not the stop information transmitted from the main control means 1100 has been received (step S1621). When it is determined that the stop information has not been received from the main control means 1100 (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop information has been received from the main control means 1100 (YES), the operated stop switch is stored from the transmitted stop information (step S1622), and this subroutine is terminated.

When it is determined (NO) that the value of the flag F_adjustment is not 1 in the determination process of step S1620 described above, it is determined whether or not the received information is game state information (step S1602). This game state information is information transmitted from the main control means 1100 by the process of step S1005 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 described above. When it is determined that the received information is the game state information (YES), the value of the flag F_game_run is set to 1 (step S1603). This flag F_game_run is a flag indicating whether or not a unit game is being performed under the control of the main control means 1100. When the value of the flag F_game_run is 1, it indicates that the unit game is being performed, and when the value of the flag F_game_run is 0, it indicates that the unit game is not being performed.

Next, the game state indicated by the transmitted game state information is stored (step S1604), the value of the variable C_game is increased by 1 according to the game state (step S1605), and this subroutine is terminated. This variable C_game counts the number of unit games played under the control of the main control means 1100 for each game state. Here, as described above, the game states include the normal game state, the first-class BB game state, the second-class BB game state, the RB game state, the SB game state, the CB game state, and the re-game high-probability game. The state etc.

When it is determined (NO) that the received information is not the game state information in the determination process of step S1602 described above, it is determined whether or not the received information is the winning combination lottery result information (step S1606). This combination lottery result information is information transmitted from the main control means 1100 by the process of step S1007 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 described above. When it is determined that the received information is the winning combination lottery result information (YES), the winning combination lottery result indicated by the received winning combination lottery result information is stored (step S1607), and this subroutine is terminated.

When it is determined (NO) that the received information is not the winning combination lottery result information in the determination process of step S1606 described above, it is determined whether or not the received information is stop information (step S1608). This stop information is information transmitted from the main control means 1100 by the process of step S1202 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 12 described above. When it is determined that the received information is stop information (YES), the stop reel information indicated by the received stop information is stored (step S1609), and the symbol number indicated by the received stop information is stored (step S1610). ), End this subroutine.

The stop reel information stored in step S1609 is information that identifies the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R. For example, when the stop switch 1044a is operated by the player and the stop information is transmitted, the information for identifying the reel 1030L is stored. When the stop switch 1044b is operated by the player and the stop information is transmitted, the information for identifying the reel 1030C is stored. When the stop switch 1044c is operated by the player and the stop information is transmitted, the information for identifying the reel 1030R is stored. The symbol numbers stored in step S1610 are numbers 0 to 20 for identifying the 21 symbols attached to each of the three reels 1030L, 1030C, and 1030R (see FIG. 6).

When it is determined (NO) that the received information is not stop information in the determination process of step S1608 described above, it is determined whether or not the received information is winning information (step S1611). This winning information is information transmitted from the main control means 1100 by the process of step S1322 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 13 described above. When it is determined that the received information is the winning information (YES), the information of the stop symbol indicated by the winning information is stored (step S1612), the value of the flag F_game_run is set to 0 (step S1613), and the present End the subroutine. The received winning information includes information indicating the type of winning combination and information indicating the arrangement of symbols stopped on the valid winning line. Further, by setting the value of the flag F_game_run to 0 by the process of step S1613, it is assumed that the unit game performed under the control of the main control means 1100 is completed, and the control in the sub control means 1200 is executed. Can be done.

When it is determined (NO) that the received information is not the winning information in the determination process of step S1611 described above, it is determined whether or not the received information is the end information (step S1614). This end information is information transmitted from the main control means 1100 by the process of step S1413 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 13 described above. This end information is information indicating that various game states have ended. For example, information indicating that the first-class BB game state has ended is transmitted from the main control means 1100 as end information. When it is determined that the received information is the end information (YES), the game state stored in the process of step S1604 described above is cleared (step S1615), and this subroutine is terminated.

When it is determined (NO) that the received information is not the end information in the determination process of step S1614 described above, it is determined whether or not the received information is the set value information (step S1616). When it is determined that the received information is the set value information, the set value information is stored (step S1617), and this subroutine is terminated. This set value information is information transmitted from the main control means 1100 by the process of step S1003 of the subroutine shown in FIG. 10 described above.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received information is not the set value information, it is determined whether or not the received information is the settlement information (step S1618). When it is determined that the received information is the settlement information (YES), the value of the flag F_adjustment is set to 1 (step S1619), and this subroutine is terminated. This flag F_adjustment is used in the determination process of step S1620 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received information is not the settlement information (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

By executing the above-described processing, various information transmitted from the main control means 1100 can be processed for the control of the sub control means 1200.
<<< Control processing in the gaming machine system 10 >>>
Hereinafter, the control process in the gaming machine system 10 will be described. As described above, the gaming machine system 10 includes a slot machine 1010, a mobile phone 2100, and a gaming machine server 3100, and describes processing executed by each of these and various information transmitted and received between them. explain.

In the following, the slot machine 1010, the mobile phone 2100, and the gaming machine server 3100 have been started in advance, and these have completed startup processing such as initialization of various variables used for control and are in steady operation. It is assumed that there is.
<< Membership registration process >>
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an outline of the member registration process. The flowchart shown in FIG. 17 shows the processes executed by the slot machine 1010, the mobile phone 2100, and the gaming machine server 3100, the correspondence between these processes, and transmission or reception between these devices. It is a flowchart which shows the outline with the information.
<Processing in slot machine 1010>
In the slot machine 1010, the game is executed by the operation of the player (step S17101). This game is a unit game played at least once as described above. Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed by the player (step S17102). This predetermined operation is an operation of an operation unit such as a switch or a button that can be operated by the player, and an operation that is not directly related to the progress of the game is preferable. In the present embodiment, it is preferable that the predetermined operation by the player is, for example, the operation of the settlement button 1054 by the player. The process executed by operating the settlement button 1054 is executed by the process of FIG. 15 described above. When it is determined in the determination process of step S17102 that the predetermined operation by the player has not been performed (NO), the process is returned to step S17101, and the game is continuously executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination process of step S17102 that a predetermined operation has been performed by the player (YES), a QR code (quick response code) is generated (step S17103), and the generated QR code is used as a slot machine. It is displayed on the display device 1034 of 1010 (step S17104), and this subroutine is terminated. The QR code generated in step S17103 described above includes information on a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) indicating the location of the gaming machine server 3100. The QR code is a kind of two-dimensional code having information in two directions, a vertical direction and a horizontal direction, and can be displayed as an image on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010. The QR code described above corresponds to "access information", and the URL corresponds to "location information".

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the QR code displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 is imaged and analyzed by the mobile phone 2100. Therefore, what is displayed on the display device 1034 is not limited to the QR code, and may be any one that can be imaged and analyzed by the mobile phone 2100.
<Processing in mobile phone 2100>
In the mobile phone 2100, first, the QR code displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 is imaged by the image sensor 2128 by the player's operation (step S17201). This QR code is displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 by executing the process of step S17104 described above in the slot machine 1010.

Next, the captured QR code is analyzed and converted into character information indicating the URL included in the QR code to acquire the URL indicating the location of the gaming machine server 3100 (step S17202).

Next, the gaming machine server 3100 indicated by the acquired URL is accessed, and a form request indicating that the form for generating the password is transmitted is transmitted to the gaming machine server 3100 (step S17203). This password is for identifying the player so that the game can be played on the slot machine 1010, and is character information including various information for the game played on the slot machine 1010. It is generated by the game machine server 3100. The details of the password will be described later. This password corresponds to the "game execution information".

Next, various information input forms transmitted from the game machine server 3100 are received (step S17204), the received various information input forms are displayed on the display device 2110 of the mobile phone 2100 (step S17205), and the key by the player is displayed. By the operation of 2120, the player identification information is input (step S17206), and the input player identification information and the mobile phone identification information are transmitted to the game machine server 3100 (step S17207). The player-specific information described above is information about the player and is information used when generating a password. For example, there is information such as a name and a handle name, and information such as an e-mail address, an address, and a gender. Further, the mobile phone identification information is information allocated in advance for identifying the mobile phone 2100, and one mobile phone 2100 can be specified by one mobile phone identification information. This mobile phone identification information can also be used as information for identifying the player who owns the mobile phone 2100. This mobile phone 2100 specific information corresponds to "mediator means specific information".

Next, the password generated and transmitted by the gaming machine server 3100 is received (step S17208), and this subroutine is terminated. As will be described later, the password transmitted from the gaming machine server 3100 is displayed on the display device 2110 of the mobile phone 2100.
<Processing in the gaming machine server 3100>
The gaming machine server 3100 receives the form request transmitted from the mobile phone 2100 by the process of step S17203 described above (step S17301), and in response to the received form request, the mobile phone 2100 receives various predetermined information input forms. (Step S17302). By this process, in the mobile phone 2100, as described above, various information input forms are displayed on the display device 2110 of the mobile phone 2100.

Next, the player identification information transmitted from the mobile phone 2100 is received (step S17303), a password is generated based on the received player identification information (step S17304), and the generated password is transmitted to the mobile phone 2100. (Step S17305), this subroutine is terminated. The password transmitted by the process of step S17303 is received by the mobile phone 2100 by the process of step S17204 described above.

By this member registration process, the game machine server 3100 generates a password based on the player specific information and the mobile phone specific information transmitted from the mobile phone 2100, and transmits the generated password to the mobile phone 2100. The password generated by the member registration process is used to identify and identify the player when the player plays a game on the slot machine 1010 after registering as a member, and then proceed with the game for each player. It is information to be able to be. The password is also information used to store the progress and status of the game in the game machine server 3100 after the game is played.

Further, in the above-mentioned member registration process, in order to connect the mobile phone 2100 to the gaming machine server 3100 in an accessible manner, it is sufficient if the URL indicating the location of the gaming machine server 3100 can be acquired, and the QR code is displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010. The character information of the URL may be directly displayed on the display device 1034 without displaying the URL. In this case, the mobile phone 2100 can be connected to the game machine server 3100 so as to be accessible by the player inputting the character information of the URL displayed on the display device 1034 into the mobile phone 2100.

Further, the QR code including the URL indicating the location of the gaming machine server 3100 and the character information of the URL are displayed not only on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 but also on other media such as magazines. May be good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the gaming machine server 3100 processes so as to generate a password, but the password is preferably information composed of a character string that can be visually recognized by the player.

Further, as described above, the password at the time of member registration is generated in the gaming machine server 3100 based on the player identification information and the mobile phone identification information transmitted from the mobile phone 2100. When the game is played on the slot machine 1010 and the password is generated after the member registration, the game machine server 3100 generates the password based on the game-related information related to the game played on the slot machine 1010. The details of the game-related information and the process of generating a password based on the game-related information will be described with reference to FIG. 27.
<< Game-related information storage processing >>
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process for storing game-related information about a game played in the slot machine 1010 in the game machine server 3100 when the player plays a game in the slot machine 1010. The flowchart shown in FIG. 18 also shows the processes executed by the slot machine 1010, the mobile phone 2100, and the gaming machine server 3100, the correspondence between these processes, and the transmission or reception between these devices. It is a flowchart which shows the outline with the information.

Here, the game-related information is information stored in the game-related information storage means 1282 of the slot machine 1010 in order to generate a QR code, and is based on the time when the password is input to the slot machine 1010. This is information about the game that has changed as the game progresses. The game-related information also includes information indicating the history of the game. Further, the game-related information may be based on the progress of the game, and includes not only the information that changes according to the progress of the game but also the information that changes according to the progress of the production performed with the progress of the game, at least. Contains one type of information.

As will be described later, by the game-related information storage process of FIG. 18, the game-related information stored in the game machine server 3100 is restored to the slot machine 1010 again, so that the game played by the player in the past can be performed. The degree of progress and the situation can be restored, and the game can be restarted for each player from the restored state. By doing this, even if you change the gaming machine and play the game again, or if you play the game again on a different day, after restoring the degree and situation of the progress of the game you played in the past, you can continue. You can play the game.
<Processing in the gaming machine server 3100>
As described in the flowchart of FIG. 17, the gaming machine server 3100 generates a password (step S17304) and transmits the generated password to the mobile phone 2100 (step S17305).

The password generation process in step S17304 in FIG. 18 may be performed at the time of member registration or after member registration.

As described above, the password at the time of member registration is generated based on the player identification information and the mobile phone identification information transmitted from the mobile phone 2100. The password generated at the time of member registration is information for allowing a player to play a game on the slot machine 1010 after identifying or identifying the player and then proceeding with the game for each player. be. Therefore, the password generated at the time of member registration may include member ID information (player identification information).

On the other hand, the password is generated after the member registration is performed based on the game-related information related to the game performed by the slot machine 1010. The password generated after membership registration identifies and identifies the player when the player plays a game on the slot machine 1010, and then the degree and status of the progress of the game played by the player in the past. This is information for restoring the game so that the game can be restarted for each player from the restored state. Therefore, the password generated after the member registration includes not only the member ID information (player identification information) but also the achievement status information and the effect customization setting information (effect control information). The achievement status information and the effect customization setting information (effect control information) are the processes of steps S18108 to S18110 executed by the slot machine 1010, which will be described later, the processes of steps S1823 to S18206 executed by the mobile phone 2100, and the game. It is stored in the gaming machine server 3100 by the processing of steps S1831 and S18302 executed by the machine server 3100.
<Processing in mobile phone 2100>
Corresponding to the process of step S17305 executed by the game machine server 3100 described above, the mobile phone 2100 receives the password transmitted from the game machine server 3100 (step S17208). Next, in the mobile phone 2100, the received password is stored in the RAM 2106 (step S1821) and displayed on the display device 2110 (step S18202). As will be described later, the player manually inputs the password into the slot machine 1010 while looking at the password displayed on the display device 2110. The password is input to and processed by the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010.
<Processing in slot machine 1010>
The player can enter the password into the slot machine 1010 by performing a predetermined operation. Similar to the predetermined operation described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined operation by the player is preferably the operation of the settlement button 1054 by the player. When the slot machine 1010 is ready to enter the password, the player connects the mobile phone 2100 to the game machine server 3100 and causes the display device 2110 to display the password by the process of step S18202 described above. The player visually recognizes the password displayed on the display device 2110 and manually inputs it into the slot machine 1010. The password is input to the slot machine 1010 by the manual operation of the player (step S18101). As described above, the password input process is executed by the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010.

Next, various information included in the entered password is extracted (step S18102). The various information extracted from the password includes, for example, member ID information, achievement status information, and effect customization setting information. As described above, the password generation generated at the time of member registration includes only the member ID information.

The member ID information is information used to identify or identify a player when playing a game on the slot machine 1010. Mainly, for identifying or identifying a player by generating member ID information based on the information for identifying the mobile phone 2100 and the information for identifying the mobile phone 2100 stored in the mobile phone 2100. It can be information. Those generated based on the above-mentioned player specific information and mobile phone specific information (mediation means specific information) are preferable. This member ID information corresponds to "player identification information".

The achievement status information is information that is changed by at least one of the change of the "game progress information" and the clearing of the "progress establishment condition". For example, it is a parameter that is changed by at least one of the state of "game history" and "clearing the mission". In the present embodiment, the achievement status information is also referred to as a Kyun Kyun meter.

The above-mentioned "game progress information" is history information indicating the history of the played game, and refers to information that inevitably changes as the game progresses. For example, there are the number of times a unit game is played and the number of times a special role is won. Further, the "progress establishment condition" refers to a condition determined according to at least one of the progress of the game and the progress of the effect performed based on the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, the "progress establishment condition" may be referred to as a mission. When the game or production is advanced, it is determined that the conditions set for this mission have been satisfied, so that the mission has been cleared and the satisfaction information is generated.

The effect customization setting information is information for setting the content of the effect to be performed by the effect means 1300 (for example, the image display device 1034, the speaker 1036), and the effect control means (sub control means 1200) uses the effect customization setting information. Based on this, the content of the production is determined. This effect customization setting information corresponds to "effect control information". For example, the sound such as music emitted from the speaker 1036 of the slot machine 1010 can be set or changed according to the effect customization setting information, or the image displayed on the image display device 1034 can be set or changed according to the effect customization setting information. be able to.

After executing the process of step S18102 described above, the member ID information extracted from the password is stored in the member ID information storage means 1284 of the sub-control means 1200 (step S18103), and the achievement status information extracted from the password is reflected (step). S18104), the effect is customized according to the effect customization setting information extracted from the password (step S18105).

The processing of steps S18101 to S18105 described above will be described in more detail with reference to the subroutine shown in FIG.

After executing the process of step S18105, the game is executed in the slot machine 1010 (step S18106), and it is determined whether or not a predetermined operation has been performed by the player (step S18107). The game executed in the process of step S18106 is a game controlled and progressed by the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010, and is the same as that executed in the process of step S17101 of FIG. 17 described above. Further, the determination process in step S18107 is the same as the determination process in step S17102 in FIG. 17 described above. Therefore, the predetermined operation in the determination process of step S18107 is an operation of an operation unit such as a switch or a button that can be operated by the player, and an operation that is not directly related to the progress of the game is preferable. As the predetermined operation, for example, the operation of the settlement button 1054 for paying out the medals that have been inserted and stored in advance is preferable.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S18107 that the predetermined operation has not been performed (NO), the process is returned to step S18106 described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined operation has been performed (YES), the game-related information is read from the game-related information storage means 1282 of the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 based on the predetermined operation. (Step S18108), a QR code is generated based on the read game-related information (step S18109), the generated QR code is displayed on the image display device 1034 (step S18110), and this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, the game-related information is information for generating a QR code. The QR code at the time of membership registration shown in FIG. 17 described above may include a URL indicating the location of the gaming machine server 3100. Since the game-related information storage process of FIG. 18 is a process after the game is played by the player, the degree and status of the progress of the game are shown in addition to the URL information indicating the location of the game machine server 3100. Game-related information, which is information, is also included in the QR code.

As described above, since the game-related information is information indicating the degree and status of the progress of the game, various information indicating the degree and status of the progress of the game is included. For example, illustration acquisition information (production progress information), mission achievement information, number of unit games performed from password input to generation, number of winning bonuses (game progress information), level of Kyun Kyun Meter (achievement status information) Member ID There is information (player identification information), set value (setting information), ball ejection information (game medium information), and the like.

The illustration acquisition information is a kind of production progress information indicating the degree and status of the progress of the production performed based on the progress of the game. The illustration acquisition information is information for storing an illustration displayed as an effect image on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010, and by referring to this information, whether a predetermined illustration has already been displayed or has not been displayed yet. Can be judged, and the degree and situation of the progress of the production can be judged.

The mission achievement information (satisfaction information) is information generated when it is determined that the mission (progress establishment condition) has been cleared. The mission (progress establishment condition) is a condition determined according to at least one of the progress of the game and the progress of the production performed based on the progress of the game. When the game or production is advanced, it is determined that the conditions set as the mission are satisfied, so that the mission (progress establishment condition) is cleared and the satisfaction information is generated. From this mission achievement information (satisfaction information), it is possible to judge the degree and situation of the progress of the game and the degree and situation of the progress of the production.

The degree of progress of the game is based on the number of unit games played from the time the password is entered until the next password is generated, and the number of times the special role (bonus) was won during that period, which indicates the history of the game. And the situation can be judged. In the present embodiment, the history information showing the history of the played game, such as the number of such unit games and the number of times the special role is won, is the information that inevitably changes as the game progresses. It is called "progress information".

The achievement status information is information that is changed by at least one of the change of the "game progress information" and the clearing of the "progress establishment condition". For example, information that is changed by at least one of the "game history" state and "clearing a mission" (like). In the present embodiment, it is also referred to as "Kyun Kyun Meter".

As described above, the member ID information is information used for identifying or identifying a player when playing a game on the slot machine 1010.

The set value of the slot machine 1010 is a value determined by the administrator of the slot machine 1010 operating the designated value setting means 1027, and defines the conditions for performing the lottery process executed in the game. As a result, it is a value that affects the difficulty level of the game.

The medal payout information is information on the balance of the game medium used to advance the game.

The player can acquire the information included in the QR code by capturing the QR code displayed on the image display device 1034 with the image sensor 2128 of the mobile phone 2100 by the process of step S18110.
<Processing in mobile phone 2100>
As described above, when the QR code is displayed on the image display device 1034, the player captures the QR code displayed on the image display device 1034 with the image sensor 2128 of the mobile phone 2100. By the operation of this player, the QR code is imaged by the image sensor 2128 of the mobile phone 2100 (step S18203).

Next, by analyzing the image of the captured QR code, it is converted into character information indicating the URL included in the QR code (step S18204), and the game-related information included in the QR code is extracted (step). S18205). Next, the game machine server 3100 indicated by the URL converted into the character information is accessed, the extracted game-related information is transmitted to the game machine server 3100 (step S18206), and the subroutine is terminated. The URL can be obtained from the QR code by the process of step S18204, and the game-related information can be obtained from the QR code by the process of step S18205.

In the processing subroutine in the mobile phone 2100 shown in FIG. 18, the processing of step S1823 is executed after the processing of step S18202, but the processing of step S18208, step S1821, and step S18202 and the step The processes of S1823 to S18206 may be called and executed separately. By doing so, the processing can be made independent, so that the processing and control in the mobile phone 2100 can be facilitated or simplified.
<Processing in the gaming machine server 3100>
Game-related information is transmitted from the mobile phone 2100 by step S18206 of the process in the mobile phone 2100 described above. Correspondingly, the game machine server 3100 receives the game-related information transmitted from the mobile phone 2100 (step S18301), and stores the received game-related information in the game-related information storage means 1282 of the game machine server 3100. (Step S18302), this subroutine is terminated.

When the game-related information is stored in the game-related information storage means 1282 of the game machine server 3100 by the above-mentioned step S18301 in the game machine server 3100, and then the process of the above-mentioned step S17304 is executed again to generate a password. , The stored game-related information is read, and a password is generated based on the read game-related information. By executing such a process on the game machine server 3100, the game-related information is sequentially updated as the player plays the game on the slot machine 1010, and accordingly, based on the updated game-related information. The generated password will also be updated sequentially. By configuring the game machine server 3100 to store the game-related information in this way, the game-related information can be restored to the slot machine 1010 again. By restoring the game-related information to the slot machine 1010, it is possible to restore the degree and status of the progress of the game played by the player in the past, and the game can be restarted for each player from the restored state. can. By doing so, even if the game machine is changed and the game is played again, or even if the game is played again on a different day, the slot machine 1010 that is going to play the game from now on can be played in the past. It is possible to restore the degree and situation of progress and continue the game.

In the processing subroutine in the gaming machine server 3100 shown in FIG. 18, the processing of step S18301 is executed after the processing of step S17305, but the processing of steps S17304 and 17305 and the processing of steps S18301 and step S18301 and step The process of S18302 may be called and executed separately. By doing so, the processing can be made independent, so that the processing on the gaming machine server 3100 can be facilitated or simplified.
<< Production customization process >>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an outline of a process for customizing an effect performed in association with a game performed by the slot machine 1010, which is executed by the slot machine 1010, the mobile phone 2100, and the game machine server 3100, respectively. It is a flowchart which shows the outline of the processing, the correspondence relationship of these processing, and the information transmitted or received between these devices.

The customization of the effect is, for example, to set the effect to be performed in association with the game performed by the slot machine 1010 based on the player's intention. For example, the image displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 is set, or the sound emitted from the speaker 1036 is set. By operating the mobile phone 2100, the player sets the content of the customization, and transmits the effect customization specification information indicating the content to the game machine server 3100, so that the game machine server 3100 becomes the effect customization specification information. Generate production customization setting information based on. Further, the gaming machine server 3100 includes the generated effect customization setting information in the password to generate the password.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect customization setting information for customizing the effect performed in association with the game performed by the slot machine 1010 is included in the password generated by the game machine server 3100. By integrating the information included in the password in this way, the information to be handled can be unified, and the processing such as transmission / reception can be simplified or facilitated.
<Processing in mobile phone 2100>
First, the player operates the mobile phone 2100 to transmit the effect customization setting form request from the mobile phone 2100 to the game machine server 3100 (step S19201). This effect customization setting form request requests the gaming machine server 3100 for a form to be displayed on the display device 2110 in order to set the content of the effect customization.

Next, the effect customization setting form transmitted from the gaming machine server 3100 is received in response to the process of step S19201 (step S19202), and the received effect customization setting form is displayed on the display device 2110 (step S19203). According to the effect customization setting form displayed on the display device 2110, the player operates the mobile phone 2100 to set the content of the effect customization (step S19204). The effect customization specification information indicating the content of the effect customization set by the process of step S19204 is generated and transmitted to the gaming machine server 3100 (step S19205).

As will be described later, the gaming machine server 3100 generates a password based on the effect customization designation information transmitted from the mobile phone 2100, and transmits the generated password to the mobile phone 2100. The mobile phone 2100 receives the password transmitted from the gaming machine server 3100 (step S17208), stores the received password in the RAM 2106 (step S1821), and displays it on the display device 2110 (step S18202). The processing of step S17208, step S18201, and step S18202 is the same as the processing in FIG.
<Processing in the gaming machine server 3100>
The game machine server 3100 receives the effect customization setting form request transmitted from the mobile phone 2100 to the game machine server 3100 in response to the process of step S19201 executed in the mobile phone 2100 described above (step S19301). In response to the effect customization setting form request, the effect customization setting form is transmitted to the mobile phone 2100 (step S19302).

Further, in response to the process of step S19205 executed in the mobile phone 2100 described above, the effect customization specification information is received (step S19303), and a password is generated based on the received effect customization specification information (step S19304). , The generated password is transmitted to the mobile phone 2100 (step S19305). The processing of step S19304 and step S19305 is the same as the processing of step S17304 and step S17305 of FIG. 18 described above.
<Processing in slot machine 1010>
In the mobile phone 2100, the password is displayed on the display device 2110 by the process of step S18202 described above, so that the player manually inputs the password into the slot machine 1010 while looking at the password displayed on the display device 2110. (Step S18101). By inputting the password into the slot machine 1010, various information included in the input password is extracted (step S18102), and the member ID information extracted from the password is stored in the member ID information storage means 1284 of the sub-control means 1200. (Step S18103), the achievement status information extracted from the password is reflected (step S18104), and the effect is customized according to the effect customization setting information extracted from the password (step S18105). The processing of these steps S18101 to S18105 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 18 described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, customization information is extracted from the password generated by the gaming machine server 3100, and the extracted customization information is used to customize by changing the contents of variables and flag values required for production. The information can be reflected, and the effect performed in association with the game performed by the slot machine 1010 can be customized according to the player's intention.

By executing the process shown in FIG. 19, the player can customize the content of the effect executed by the slot machine 1010 by inputting the password displayed on the mobile phone 2100 into the slot machine 1010. can. As the effect that can be customized, it is preferable to set the image displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 or set the sound emitted from the speaker 1036.
<< Processing selection operation processing >>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a process for selecting and operating a process executed by the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010.

In the process of receiving the settlement information, a menu is displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 in response to the player operating the settlement button 1054, and the member registration process and the password input are performed from the menu. It is a process for executing a process and a process for generating and displaying a password.

First, it is determined whether or not the value of the flag F_adjustment is 1 (step S2001). The flag F_adjustment is a flag indicating whether or not the settlement button 1054 has been operated by the player. When the value of the flag F_adjustment is 1, it indicates that the settlement button 1054 has been operated by the player, and the value of the flag F_adjustment is When it is 0, it indicates that the checkout button 1054 has not been operated by the player. The determination process in step S2001 is equivalent to the determination process in step S17102 shown in FIG.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S2001 that the value of the flag F_adjustment is not 1, that is, the value of the flag F_adjustment is 0 (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flag F_adjustment is 1 (YES), the menu is displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 (step S2002). In this menu, "member registration process", "password input process", and "process end" are displayed (not shown). As will be described later, the player operates three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c to select the process displayed in this menu.

After executing the process of step S2002, it is determined whether or not the bet information has been received (step S2003). The bet information is information indicating that the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064 or the maximum bet switch 1066 has been operated. When the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064, or the maximum bet switch 1066 is operated, bet information is transmitted from the main control means 1100 to the sub control means 1200. The determination process of step S2003 is a process of determining whether or not the sub control means 1200 has received the bet information transmitted from the main control means 1100.

When it is determined (NO) in the determination process of step S2003 that the bet information has not been received, it is determined whether or not the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c have been operated (step S2004). As described above, when the menu is displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010, the player operates the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c to select the processing of the displayed menu. Can be done. When it is determined in the determination process of step S2004 that the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c are not operated (NO), the process is returned to step S2002 described above.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the determination process of step S2004 that the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b or 1044c have been operated (YES), it is determined whether or not any process has been selected (step S2005). When it is determined that none of the processes is selected (NO), the process is returned to step S2002 described above. When it is determined (YES) in the determination process of step S2005 that some process has been selected, it is determined whether or not the selected process is the "member registration process" (step S2006). When it is determined that "member registration processing" is selected (YES), the URL is indicated from the information of the predetermined URL stored in advance in the URL information storage means 1286 of the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. A QR code is generated (step S2007), the generated QR code is displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 (step S2008), and the process is returned to step S2002 described above. The information of this predetermined URL indicates the location of the gaming machine server 3100. The process of step S2007 described above is the same as the process of step S17103 of FIG. 17, and the process of step S2008 is the same as the process of step S17104 of FIG.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S2006 described above that the selected process is not the "member registration process" (NO), whether or not the selected process is the "password input process". Is determined (step S2009). When it is determined that "password input processing" is selected (YES), the password input subroutine described later is called and executed (step S2010), and the processing is returned to step S2002 described above.

Further, when it is determined in the determination process of step S2009 described above that the selected process is not the "password input process" (NO), it is determined whether or not the process end is selected (step S2011). .. When it is determined that the end of processing is selected (YES), the QR code / password generation subroutine described later is called and executed (step S2012), and the processing is returned to step S2002 described above.

By executing the above-described processing, the player can execute any of the processing of "member registration processing", "password input processing", and "processing end".

When it is determined (YES) that the bet information has been received in the determination process of step S2003 described above, the value of the flag F_adjustment is set to 0 (step S2013), and this subroutine is terminated. By doing so, when the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064 or the maximum bet switch 1066 is operated after the player operates the settlement button 1054, the game controlled by the main control means 1100 is started. To return the process to normal control.
<< Password input process >>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a process for inputting a password executed by the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010.

The player manually inputs the password into the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 while visually recognizing the password displayed on the display device 2110 of the mobile phone 2100. The input operation may be any switch or button that can be operated by the player, such as the stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c.

As described above, since the password is for manually inputting to the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010, the password is preferably composed of characters or character strings that can be visually recognized by the player. In particular, it is preferable that the password is composed of characters such as alphabets and numerical values that can express one character in one byte and can be recognized by the player.

The password is generated by the gaming machine server 3100, and as described above, the password generated at the time of membership registration includes member ID information (player identification information). Further, the password generated after the member registration includes not only the member ID information (player identification information) but also the achievement status information and the effect customization setting information (effect control information).

First, an image for inputting a password to the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 is displayed on the display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010 (step S2101). Next, a predetermined character is input according to the operation of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c by the player (step S2102), and the operations of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are input ends. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2103). When it is determined (NO) that the operations of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are not intended to end the input, the process is returned to step S2102 described above, and the process of inputting the next character is executed. .. By repeatedly executing this step S2102, at least one character can be input as a password in the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010.

In this way, by manually configuring the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 to input the password regardless of the machine or the device, it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the slot machine 1010. Further, the process of step S2102 described above is the same as the process of step S18101 of FIG. 18 or FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the operations of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c are for terminating the input (YES), it is determined whether or not the input password is valid (yes). Step S2104). This determination process is a process of checking whether or not an appropriate character string is input as the password, and by performing this determination process, it is possible to prevent an illegal act on the slot machine 1010. When it is determined that the entered password is not valid (NO), the process is returned to step S2102 described above.

When it is determined that the entered password is valid (YES), information such as achievement status information, member ID information, and effect customization setting information is extracted from the entered password (step S2105). .. Next, the member ID extracted from the password is stored in the member ID storage means 1284 (step S2106), the achievement status information extracted from the password is stored in the achievement status information storage means 1288, and according to the content of the achievement status information. , Update the values and contents of the variables related to the achievement status information, the values of the flags related to the achievement status information, etc. (step S2107), and according to the contents of the effect customization setting information extracted from the password, the values of various variables related to the effect The content, the value of the flag related to the effect, and the like are updated (step S2108), the game progress information is initialized (step S2109), and this subroutine is terminated.

In this way, by the process of step S2107, the value and content of the variable related to the achievement status information, the value of the flag related to the achievement status information, and the like can be updated according to the content of the achievement status information. By doing so, it is possible to restore the degree and status of the progress of the game played by the player in the past, and the game can be restarted for each player from the restored state. By doing this, even if you change the gaming machine and play the game again, or if you play the game again on a different day, after restoring the degree and situation of the progress of the game you played in the past, you can continue. You can play the game.

Further, the game progress information is initialized by the process of step S2109. For example, the value such as the number of times a unit game is played or the number of times a special role is won is initialized. In this way, even if another person has played a game on the gaming machine by then, the game progress information is initialized, so that the game progress of the game performed by a certain player after that. The information can be information only for the player, and when the player who has registered as a member plays a game, the game progress information can be accurately recorded, and the degree and situation of the progress of the game can be accurately recorded. It can be restored.

The process of step S2105 described above is the same as the process of step S18102 of FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, the process of step S2106 is the same as the process of step S18103 of FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, and the process of step S2107. Is the same as the process of step S18104 of FIG. 18 or FIG. 19, and the process of step S2108 is the same as the process of step S18105 of FIG. 18 or FIG.
<< Slot machine side QR code / password generation process >>
FIG. 22 is a QR code / password generation process executed by the sub-control means 1200, and is a subroutine called and executed in step S2012 of FIG. 20 described above. The subroutine shown in FIG. 22 is for displaying a QR code and a password on the image display device 1034 of the slot machine 1010.

As described above, the QR code (quick response code) is a kind of two-dimensional code having information in two directions, the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. The QR code is generated by the game-related information. Game-related information includes, for example, illustration acquisition information (directing progress information), mission achievement information (satisfaction information), the number of unit games performed from password entry to generation, the number of winning bonuses (game progress information), and Kyun Kyun. There are meter level (achievement status information), member ID information (player identification information), set value (setting information), ball ejection information (game medium information), and the like.

First, the game-related information is read from the game-related information storage means 1282 of the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 (step S2201). As the player plays the game on the slot machine 1010, various information is transmitted from the main control means 1100 to the sub control means 1200. The sub-control means 1200 executes various processes based on this information. The information transmitted from the main control means 1100 and the processing executed by the sub control means 1200 update the game-related information as the game progresses. The updated game-related information is sequentially stored in the game-related information storage means 1282 of the sub-control means 1200. The process of step S18108 described above is a process of reading out the latest game-related information that has been updated and stored.

Next, a QR code is generated based on the read game-related information (step S2202). In this process, the QR code may be generated based on the game-related information according to a predetermined procedure (not shown) for generating the QR code. Next, the generated QR code is displayed on the image display device 1034 (step S2203).

Further, a password is also generated based on the read game-related information (step S2204), the generated password is also displayed on the image display device 1034 (step S2205), and this subroutine is terminated.

In the slot machine 1010, if the QR code is generated and displayed, as described above, by executing the process of FIG. 18, the displayed QR code is imaged by the mobile phone 2100, and the gaming machine server 3100. Game-related information can be saved in. Therefore, in the slot machine 1010, it is not necessary to generate a password and display it on the image display device 1034 in principle. However, it is fully assumed that the player goes to the game store and plays the game without possessing the mobile phone 2100. That is, if the player cannot record any information about the game even though the player has played the game, the player is disappointed and the interest in the game is sharply reduced. Therefore, such inconvenience can be prevented by leaving the minimum game history in the password. As described above, since the password includes the achievement status information, the achievement status information can be saved by the player writing down the password on a piece of paper or the like. Next time, when the player plays a game on the slot machine 1010, the achievement status information can be restored by inputting the password written down on the paper or the like into the slot machine 1010, and the restored achievement status can be restored. The game can be restarted from the information.

In the present embodiment, the case where the game-related information is transmitted from the slot machine 1010 to the mobile phone 2100 by using the QR code is shown, but it is not limited to the QR code and is updated and stored in the slot machine 1010. Anything that can transmit game-related information to the mobile phone 2100 may be used.

The process of step S2201 described above is the same as the process of step S18108 of FIG. 18, the process of step S2202 is the same as the process of step S18109 of FIG. 18, and the process of step S2203 is the process of step S18110 of FIG. Same as processing.
<< Achievement status information value addition process 1 >>
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a process for adding the value of the achievement state information executed by the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. By executing this process, the value of the achievement state information can be added as the game progresses in the slot machine 1010, that is, as the repeated unit game is performed.

First, it is determined whether or not the unit game is completed by the control process of the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 (step S2301). This determination process can be performed by determining whether or not the end information from the main control means 1100 has been received. When it is determined that the unit game has not been completed (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated. By executing the determination process of step S2301, the following processes of steps S2302 to S2306 can be executed each time the unit game is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the unit game has been completed (YES), the addition value is determined according to the number of unit games and the number of times the special combination is won (step S2302), and the value of the achievement status information is added value. (Step S2303). For example, every time a unit game is played 100 times, the addition value is set to 1, and the value of the achievement status information is increased by 1, or every time the first-class BB combination is won, the addition value is set to 3, and the achievement status information is set. Increase the value of by 3. This added value is a value that is predetermined and stored according to the conditions.

Next, it is determined whether or not the mission has been cleared (step S2304). As described above, the mission (progress establishment condition) is a condition determined according to at least one of the progress of the game and the progress of the production performed based on the progress of the game. It is said that the mission is cleared when it is determined that the conditions set as the mission are satisfied when the game or production is advanced.

The mission is a condition determined according to the progress of the game and the progress of the production. An example of the mission is shown in FIG. For example, there are conditions determined according to the progress of the game, such as winning a special role in the RT game state or winning a special role in succession. In addition, it is determined according to the progress of the production, such as winning a special role while performing a physical education production, or winning a special role while performing a swimming production. There are also conditions.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S2303 that the mission has not been cleared (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mission has been cleared (YES), the added value corresponding to the cleared mission is read out (step S2305), and the value of the achievement status information is read out with reference to the table as shown in FIG. 24. The added value is increased by the added value (step S2306), the value of the achievement status information is stored (step S2307), and this subroutine is terminated. FIG. 24 is a table conceptually showing a mission-addition value correspondence table that defines the relationship between various missions and the addition value corresponding to each of them, and the mission-addition value correspondence table is the slot machine 1010. It is stored in advance in the mission-addition value correspondence table storage means 1290 of the sub control means 1200.

Specifically, when it is determined in the determination process of step S2303 that the mission has been cleared, the addition value corresponding to the cleared mission is read out by referring to the mission-addition value correspondence table in the process of step S2305. In the process of step S2306, the value of the achievement status information is increased by the read added value.

For example, if the cleared mission is that a special role was won while performing a tennis production, this mission is the 47th mission in the mission-addition value correspondence table shown in FIG. 24. Therefore, the addition value 2 is read out in the process of step S2305. In the process of step S2306, the value of the achievement status information is increased by the read added value 2.

As shown in FIG. 23 described above, in the process for adding the value of the achievement state information, in step S2302, the addition value is determined according to the number of unit games and the number of times the special combination is won. However, the number of unit games and the number of times a special role is won may be included in the type of mission so as to omit the processing of steps S2302 and S2303. By doing so, the configuration can be simplified and the process can be executed quickly. << Achievement status information value addition process 2 >>
As described above, the process for adding the value of the achievement state information shown in FIG. 23 was executed by the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. The process for adding the value of the achievement status information does not have to be performed only on the slot machine 1010, and can also be executed on the game machine server 3100. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a process for adding the value of the achievement status information executed by the gaming machine server 3100.

It is extremely difficult to change the control process of the slot machine 1010 after it is delivered to the game store, but it is easy to change the control process of the game machine server 3100. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the program for executing the process of changing the contents of the mission or reducing or increasing the types of missions. With this configuration, the processing that can be executed by the game machine server 3100 can be changed as appropriate according to the change in the value of the achievement status information acquired by the player, and the processing of the slot machine 1010 can be changed without any change. It is possible to continuously attract the interest of the player.

First, it is determined whether or not the game-related information is already stored in the management database server 3178 of the game machine server 3100 (step S2501). When it is determined that the game-related information is not yet stored (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the game-related information is already stored (YES), it is determined from the game-related information whether or not there is a cleared mission (step S2502). As described above, since the game-related information includes mission achievement information, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a cleared mission based on this mission achievement information. When it is determined that there is no cleared mission (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a cleared mission (YES), the added value corresponding to the cleared mission is read out with reference to the table as shown in FIG. 26 (step S2503), and the value of the achievement status information is read. Is increased by the added value read out (step S2504). The process of step S2503 is equivalent to the process of step S2305 of FIG. 24 described above, and the process of step S2504 is equivalent to the process of step S2306 of FIG. 24 described above. FIG. 26 is a table conceptually showing a mission-addition value correspondence table that defines the relationship between various missions and the addition value corresponding to each of them, and this mission-addition value correspondence table is a game machine server. It is stored in advance in the management database server 3178 of the 3100. The mission-addition value correspondence table shown in FIG. 26 is equivalent to the mission-addition value correspondence table shown in FIG. 24. As shown in FIG. 26, a set value can be included in the mission conditions. Since the process of FIG. 23 is executed by the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010, when the player is playing a game on the slot machine 1010, the set value of the slot machine 1010 is immediately set by the player. It is not preferable for a game store to install the slot machine 1010. Therefore, even if the slot machine 1010 is configured to be recognized by the player, it is preferable to delay the timing at which the player can recognize the set value. That is, the timing at which the player can recognize the set value can be adjusted by configuring the game machine server 3100 to determine the mission including the condition of the set value.

For example, if the cleared mission is that the achievement status value has increased by 40 or more when the set value is 4, this mission is No. 14 in the mission-addition value correspondence table shown in FIG. Since it is the mission of, the addition value 3 is read out in the process of step S2503. In the process of step S2504, the value of the achievement status information is increased by the read added value 3.

After executing the process of step S2504, the value of the achievement status information is stored (step S2505), the type of the cleared mission is stored in the management database server 3178 of the gaming machine server 3100 (step S2506), and the cleared mission is stored. Determines whether or not it relates to a set value (step S2507). In the mission-addition value correspondence table shown in FIG. 26, only missions related to the set value are shown, but missions unrelated to the set value are also defined, and the determination process in step S2507 is defined. This is a process to determine whether or not the cleared mission is related to the set value among the existing missions.

When it is determined that the cleared mission is not related to the set value (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cleared mission is related to the set value (YES), information indicating that the mission related to the set value has been cleared (hereinafter, referred to as satisfaction information) is generated (step S2508). , The display permission date on which the satisfaction information can be displayed on the display device 2110 of the mobile phone 2100 is determined (step S2509), and this subroutine is terminated.

When the game machine server 3100 generates the password after completing this subroutine, the password is generated so as to include the satisfaction information generated in step S2508 and the display permission date determined in step S2509. By transmitting the generated password to the mobile phone 2100, the satisfaction information is displayed on the display device 2110 of the mobile phone 2100 on the determined display permission date. The player can know or infer the set value when the mission is cleared from the contents of the mission by being notified of the satisfaction information.

The satisfaction information generated in step S2508 is such that a predetermined type of image is displayed or the color of the image is changed even if it directly or explicitly notifies that the mission has been cleared by text information or the like. It may be indirectly or implicitly notified. Direct or explicit notification allows the player to know the set value, and indirect or implicit notification allows the player to infer the set value.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 26, the setting value of 1 can be included as a part of the mission. When the set value is 1, the probability of winning a special role is generally set low, so that the player is shunned. However, by including the fact that the set value is 1 as a part of the mission, even if the set value is 1, it is possible to have no choice but to play a game in order to clear the mission. In this way, even in a state of being shunned by the player, the player can actively play the game, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be maintained or improved.

Further, as described above, it is not preferable for the game store that the set value of the slot machine 1010 can be immediately recognized by the player when the player is playing the game on the slot machine 1010. Therefore, it is preferable to set the display permission date so as to be later than when the player is playing the game on the slot machine 1010. Specifically, it is more preferable to set the date after the date following the date when the player is playing the game on the slot machine 1010 as the display permission date.

Further, in the determination process of step S2507 described above, instead of determining all missions related to the set value, only missions related to the set value included in the predetermined range may be determined. For example, only missions that include a set value of 1 or 2 as part of the mission may be the target of judgment.
<< Server-side password related processing >>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a process related to the password executed by the gaming machine server 3100. By this process, the gaming machine server 3100 can generate a password and transmit the generated password to the mobile phone 2100.

Based on executing the process of FIG. 22 described above, the game-related information can be transmitted from the slot machine 1010 to the game machine server 3100 via the mobile phone 2100, and the game-related information can be stored in the game machine server 3100. can. Further, based on executing the process of FIG. 27, the game-related information can be read from the game machine server 3100, and the game-related information can be transmitted from the game machine server 3100 to the slot machine 1010 via the mobile phone 2100. can. By executing the processes shown in FIGS. 22 and 27 in this way, the gaming machine server 3100 is handled as an external storage means, a temporary storage means, an auxiliary storage means, and a sub storage means for storing game-related information. be able to.

First, it is determined whether or not the player specific information and the mobile phone specific information have been received from the mobile phone 2100 (step S2701). When it is determined that the player specific information and the mobile phone specific information have been received (YES), the received player specific information and the mobile phone specific information are stored in the management database server 3178 of the game machine server 3100 (YES). Step S2702), the member ID information is generated based on the player specific information and the mobile phone specific information, and the member ID information is used as the password (step S2703). The member ID information may be generated in accordance with a rule that is uniquely determined from the player specific information and the mobile phone specific information. As described above, since the password at the time of member registration only needs to include the member ID information (player identification information), it is based on the player identification information and the mobile phone identification information transmitted from the mobile phone 2100. Member ID information may be generated.

Next, the generated password is transmitted to the mobile phone 2100 that has accessed the gaming machine server 3100 (step S2704), and this subroutine is terminated.

The process of step S2703 described above is the same as the process of step S17304 of FIG. 17, and the process of step S2704 is the same as the process of step S17305 of FIG.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S2701 described above that the player specific information and the mobile phone specific information have not been received (NO), it is determined whether or not the effect customization designation information has been received (step S2705). ). When it is determined that the effect customization specification information has been received (YES), the effect customization setting information is generated based on the received effect customization specification information (step S2706), and the generated effect customization setting information is stored (step). S2707). For example, the effect customization setting information is information for the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 to control the effect, and for example, to determine the content of the effect to be performed by the effect means 1300 (image display device 1034, speaker 1036). Information. For example, the effect customization setting information includes image data specification information for designating image data of an image to be displayed as an effect, audio data specification information for designating audio data of audio to be output as an effect, and the like.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S2705 described above that the effect customization designation information has not been received (NO), or when the process of step S2707 is executed, it is stored in the management database server 3178 of the gaming machine server 3100. Read out the game-related information (step S2708).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S2705 described above that the effect customization designation information has not been received, the player starts the game on the slot machine 1010 after completing the member registration process. , There is a case where the mobile phone 2100 is operated to send a password transmission request from the mobile phone 2100.

Next, it is determined whether or not the effect customization setting information is stored in the management database server 3178 of the gaming machine server 3100 (step S2709). When it is determined (NO) that the effect customization setting information is not stored, information consisting of the member ID information included in the game-related information read in the process of step S2708 and the achievement status information is generated. Then, use it as a password (step S2710). On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect customization setting information is stored (YES), the effect customization setting information is read (step S2711), and the member ID information included in the game-related information read in the process of step S2708 is read. And the achievement status information and the effect customization setting information read in the process of step S2711 are generated and used as the password (step S2712).

After executing the process of step S2710 or S2712 described above, the process is transferred to step S2704 described above, and this subroutine is terminated.

As described above, the password after membership registration needs to include not only the member ID information but also at least the achievement status information. Further, when the player makes a setting to customize the effect, it is necessary to include the effect customization setting information (effect control information) in the password after the member registration.

The password generated at the time of member registration is information for allowing a player to play a game on the slot machine 1010 after identifying or identifying the player and then proceeding with the game for each player. be. Therefore, the password generated at the time of member registration may include member ID information (player identification information).

On the other hand, the password is generated after the member registration is performed based on the game-related information related to the game performed by the slot machine 1010. The password generated after membership registration identifies and identifies the player when the player plays a game on the slot machine 1010, and then the degree and status of the progress of the game played by the player in the past. This is information for restoring the game so that the game can be restarted for each player from the restored state. Therefore, the password generated after the member registration needs to include at least the achievement status information as well as the member ID information (player identification information).

As described above, the password generated by the process of FIG. 27 is visually recognized by the player and manually input to the slot machine 1010. Therefore, it is preferable to use character information consisting of a normal character string. .. For example, it is preferable to use character information composed of numerical values, alphabets, and simple symbols. The password may be any character information that can be visually recognized by the player and manually entered.
<< Achievement status information value addition process 3 >>
The above-described processing of the achievement state information value addition process 1 and the process of the achievement state information value addition process 2 are processes for adding the value of the achievement state information based on playing the game on the slot machine 1010. The value of the achievement status information may be changed by a device other than the slot machine 1010. For example, the game may be executed on the mobile phone 2100 described above, and the value of the achievement status information may be added based on the player executing the game on the mobile phone 2100. Further, the value of the achievement status information may be added based on the player executing the game on the mobile phone 2100 on a home-use game machine or the like. When a player executes a game on a mobile phone 2100 on a home-use game machine or the like, a QR code is displayed on a display device such as a home-use game machine and the QR code is photographed on the mobile phone 2100. By setting this, the achievement status information can be transmitted to the game machine server 3100 and stored in the same process as when the game is played in the slot machine 1010.

By making it possible to add the value of the achievement status information with a device different from the slot machine 1010 in this way, it is possible to make the game played by the slot machine 1010 noticeable or interested.

In addition, in order to prevent fraudulent activity, when adding the achievement status information value with a device different from the slot machine 1010 such as a mobile phone 2100 or a home-use game machine, the achievement status information value may be changed directly. It is preferable to handle only the added value to be added to the value of the achievement status information. By doing so, fraudulent activity can be prevented by limiting the additional values that can be handled.

FIG. 28 shows a subroutine for processing the added value in the game machine server 3100 when the added value of the achievement status information is generated by a device different from the slot machine 1010 such as the mobile phone 2100 and the home game machine. Is.

First, it is determined whether or not an addition value of achievement status information transmitted from a device different from the slot machine 1010 such as a mobile phone 2100 or a home-use game machine has been received (step S2801). When it is determined that the added value of the achievement status information has not been received (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the added value of the achievement status information has been received (YES), the added value of the achievement status information is set to the game machine server according to the type of the device that has transmitted the added value of the achievement status information. It is stored in the management database server 3178 of 3100 (step S2802). The type of the device may be roughly classified into a mobile phone 2100 or a home-use game machine. By storing the added value of the achievement status information according to the type of the device, it is possible to easily determine the presence or absence of the unsuccessful act, and it is possible to easily manage the added value of the achievement status information.

Next, the added value of the achievement status information is added to the current achievement status information value to obtain a new achievement status information value (step S2803), and this subroutine is terminated.
<< Achievement status information value addition process 4 >>
FIG. 29 is a subroutine showing a process for determining an addition value of achievement status information by a player playing a game with a device different from the slot machine 1010 such as a mobile phone 2100 or a home-use game machine.

First, the game is executed based on the operation of the player (step S2901), and the addition value of the achievement status information is determined according to the result of the game (step S2902). Next, it is determined whether or not the added value of the achievement status information exceeds a predetermined value (step S2903). When it is determined (NO) that the added value of the achievement status information does not exceed the predetermined value, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the added value of the achievement status information exceeds the predetermined value (YES), the added value of the achievement status information is set to the predetermined value (step S2904), and the added value of the achievement status information is set to the predetermined value. A message indicating that the value has been exceeded is displayed on the display device (step S2905).

In this way, when a player plays a game with a device different from the slot machine 1010 such as a mobile phone 2100 or a home-use game machine, the added value of the achievement status information does not exceed a predetermined value. , It is possible to differentiate from when playing a game on the slot machine 1010, and it is possible to give a motivation for a person who is interested in achievement status information to actively play a game on the slot machine 1010. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the game store in which 1010 is installed.
<<< Production execution processing >>>
By the control process of the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010, various effects are advanced as the game progresses. In the game, the unit game can be repeatedly executed by the control process of the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 based on the operation of the player. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect executed by the control process of the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 is also executed according to the unit game. It is preferable that one unit effect is defined so that it can be executed according to one unit game. Since the time required for one unit game expands and contracts depending on the operation method of the player, it is preferable that each unit effect is also configured so that the time can be expanded and contracted. For example, it is preferable to configure each unit effect so as to include at least one effect of waiting at a predetermined timing until a predetermined signal is emitted from the main control means 1100.

As described above, since the unit game can be repeatedly executed, there are many cases where a plurality of types of unit effects are prepared in advance. Some of these plurality of types of unit effects are independently selected and executed according to the progress of the unit game. For example, there are independent productions and one-shot productions in which the unit production is performed independently of the content of the unit game executed before and after and the timing at which the unit production is executed.

On the other hand, in addition to such an independent effect or a single effect, a plurality of related unit effects are continuously performed while a plurality of unit games of the repeatedly executed unit games are performed. It can also be done intermittently and continuously. With this configuration, it is possible to produce a story-like effect or to produce an effect based on a predetermined theme. The plurality of related unit productions include, for example, a master-slave production, a plurality of productions, and a continuous production.

The master-slave effect is, for example, an effect including at least one main effect and at least one subordinate effect subordinate to the main effect. By performing such a master-slave effect, it is possible to perform an effect with a change of origin. In the case of this master-slave effect, it can be a condition of the mission that all of the subordinate effects have been executed.

Further, the plurality of effects is an effect in which a plurality of unit effects are grouped and associated with a predetermined theme. For example, it is possible to make a certain character always appear, or to perform an effect expressed by a certain motif. In this plurality of effects, the order in which the plurality of unit effects are performed may be predetermined, or when the unit effects are executed, what is to be executed may be determined each time. Further, it is preferable that a plurality of unit productions are divided into a first half production and a second half production, and the completion of the first half production is a condition for executing the second half production. Further, in the case of the plurality of effects, the number of unit effects executed can be a condition of the mission. For example, it can be a condition of the mission that all the unit effects have been executed.

Further, the continuous effect is an effect in which a plurality of unit effects are executed in a predetermined order and associated with each other. Only the order in which they are executed is defined, and it is possible to include an effect that is always executed and an effect that is rarely executed (hereinafter, referred to as a rare effect). In the case of continuous production, it can be a condition of the mission that this rare production is executed.

Hereinafter, each process of the master-slave effect, the plurality of effects, and the continuous effect will be described.
<< Master-slave production execution processing >>
FIG. 30 is a subroutine showing a process for executing the master-slave effect. As described above, the master-slave effect is, for example, an effect including at least one main effect and at least one subordinate effect subordinate to the main effect.

First, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the unit game is started (step S3001). When it is determined (YES) that it is the timing when the unit game is started, it is determined whether or not the processing of this master-slave effect has already been executed (step S3002). When it is determined (NO) that the master-slave effect processing has not been executed yet, it is determined whether or not a predetermined combination has been won by the combination lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120 of the main control means 1100 (step). S3003). When it is determined that the predetermined combination has not been won (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined combination has been won (YES), it is determined whether or not the content of the mission has not been decided yet (step S3004). When it is determined that the content of the mission has not been decided yet (YES), the content of the mission is determined according to the winning combination (step S3005).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3004 described above that the content of the mission has already been determined (NO), or when the process of step S3005 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the master-slave effect. (Step S3006). When it is determined (NO) that it has not been decided to execute the master-slave effect, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the master-slave effect is to be executed (YES), or when it is determined in the determination process of step S3002 described above that the master-slave effect process has already been executed (YES), the flag is flagged. It is determined whether or not the value of F_sub_effect_permission is 1 (step S3007). The flag F_sub_effect_permission is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the execution of the subordinate effect. When the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is 1, it indicates that the execution of the subordinate effect is permitted, and when the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is 0. , Indicates that the execution of the subordinate effect is not permitted.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3007 that the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is 1 (YES), the execution of the subordinate effect is started (step S3008), and when it is determined that the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is 0 (step S3008). In NO), the execution of the main effect is started (step S3009). When the process of step S3008 or S3009 described above is executed, this subroutine is terminated.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3001 described above that it is not the timing at which the unit game has started (NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the unit game has ended (step S3010). When it is determined that it is not the timing when the unit game is finished (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined (YES) that the unit game has ended, it is determined whether or not there is a unit effect that has already ended among the master-slave effects (step S3011). When it is determined that the finished unit effect does not exist (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

When it is determined (YES) that the unit effect that has already been completed exists, it is determined whether or not the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is 1 (step S3012). When it is determined (NO) that the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is not 1, it is determined whether or not the main effect is completed (step S3013). In this determination process, when the main effect is composed of a plurality of unit effects, it is determined whether or not all the plurality of unit effects have been completed. When it is determined that the main effect has not been completed (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

When it is determined that the main effect has ended (YES), the value of the flag F_main_effect_end is set to 1 (step S3014), and this subroutine ends. The flag F_main_effect_end is a flag indicating whether or not the main effect has ended. When the value of the flag F_main_effect_end is 1, it indicates that the main effect has ended, and when the value of the flag F_main_effect_end is 0, the main effect is Indicates that it has not finished.

By executing the above-mentioned process, the value of the flag F_main_effect_end is set to 1 when the main effect is completed. When the QR code is generated after executing the process of step S3014 described above, the information indicating that the main effect has been completed is included in the QR code described above. By including the information indicating that the main effect has been completed in the QR code, it is possible to acquire that the main effect has been completed in the gaming machine server 3100. The gaming machine server 3100 generates a password by including the permission information for setting the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission described above to 1 in the password based on the acquisition that the main effect has been completed. When the password is entered by the player, the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 sets the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission to 1 based on the permission information contained in the password.

By processing in this way, the execution of the sub-effect is permitted after the game machine server 3100 is once accessed, instead of permitting the execution of the sub-effect immediately after the main effect is completed. In particular, by setting to allow the execution of the subordinate effect on or after the day after the day when the game machine server 3100 is accessed, it is possible to allow the slot machine 1010 to play the game on or after the next day. It is possible to play a game in a targeted manner. It is possible to increase the chances that the player visits the game store, create an opportunity, and improve or stabilize the operating rate of the slot machine 1010 in the game store.

When it is determined (YES) that the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is 1 in the determination process of step S3012 described above, it is determined whether or not the subordinate effect is completed (step S3015). In this determination process, when the subordinate effect consists of a plurality of unit effects, it is determined whether or not all the plurality of unit effects have been completed. When it is determined that the subordinate effect has not been completed (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

When it is determined that the sub-effect has been completed (YES), the mission that the sub-effect has been completed has been cleared. Therefore, the added value corresponding to this mission is stored in the added value storage means 1292 of the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. (Step S3016), the read added value is added to the value of the current achievement status information (step S3017), and this subroutine is terminated.

FIG. 33 is a time chart showing an outline of the unit effect to be executed when the master-slave effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 33, when 10 unit games are executed by the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010, the sub control means of the slot machine 1010 corresponds to each of these 10 unit games. The unit effect is executed by the control of 1200.

In the example shown in FIG. 33, the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 executes the unit game 10 times, while the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 has 6 unit effects as the main effect and the subordinate effect. As an effect, four unit effects are executed.

First, it is determined to execute the master-slave effect based on the fact that the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 has won the special combination (steps S3003 and S3005 in FIG. 30). Based on the fact that the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 executes the unit game six times, the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 executes the six unit effects of the main effect 1 to the main effect 6. NS. When the main effect 6 is executed, it is determined that the main effect has ended, and the value of the flag F_main_effect_end is set to 1 (steps S3013 and S3014 in FIG. 30).

As described above, when the QR code is generated after the value of the flag F_main_effect_end is set to 1, the QR code described above includes information indicating that the main effect has been completed. After that, the information included in the QR code is transmitted to the gaming machine server 3100 via the mobile phone 2100. By doing so, the gaming machine server 3100 can acquire that the main effect has been completed.

After that, the gaming machine server 3100 includes the information for permitting the subordinate effect in the password based on the acquisition that the main effect has been completed, and generates the password. When the password is entered into the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 by the player, the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 is set to the flag F_sub_effect_permission based on the information included in the password for permitting the sub-effect. Set the value to 1. Based on the fact that the value of the flag F_sub_effect_permission is set to 1, the execution of the subordinate effect is started (step S3008 in FIG. 30).

With this configuration, instead of executing the sub-effect immediately after the main effect is completed, the game machine server 3100 is accessed and the game machine server 3100 is allowed to execute the sub-effect. The follow-up effect is executed. In this way, by adding the access to the game machine server 3100 to the conditions for executing the subordinate effect, it is possible to increase the chances of playing a game on the slot machine 1010 or to create an opportunity, and the slot machine 1010 is installed. It is possible to increase the occupancy rate of the game stores that have been used.
<< Multiple production execution processing >>
FIG. 31 is a subroutine showing a process for executing a plurality of effects. As described above, in the plurality of effects, the order in which the plurality of unit effects are performed may be predetermined, or when the unit effects are executed, the one to be executed may be determined each time.

First, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the unit game is started (step S3101). When it is determined (YES) that it is the timing when the unit game is started, it is determined whether or not the processing of the plurality of effects has already been executed (step S3102). When it is determined (NO) that the processing of the plurality of effects has not been executed yet, it is determined whether or not a predetermined combination has been won by the combination lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120 of the main control means 1100 (step). S3103). When it is determined that the predetermined combination has not been won (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined combination has been won (YES), it is determined whether or not the content of the mission has not been decided yet (step S3104). When it is determined that the content of the mission has not been decided yet (YES), the content of the mission is determined according to the winning combination (step S3105).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3104 described above that the content of the mission has already been determined (NO), or when the process of step S3105 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute a plurality of effects. (Step S3106). When it is determined (NO) that it has not been decided to execute a plurality of effects, this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is determined to execute the plurality of effects (YES), or when it is determined in the determination process of step S3102 described above that the processing of the plurality of effects has already been executed (YES), the process ends. It is determined whether or not the number of unit effects performed is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (step S3107). That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the unit production of the first half is completed. When it is determined (YES) that the number of completed unit effects exceeds a predetermined number, it is determined whether or not the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is 1 (step S3108). The flag F_remain_effect_permission is a flag indicating whether or not to allow the execution of the remaining unit effect, that is, the unit effect in the latter half, and when the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is 1, the execution of the remaining unit effect is permitted. When the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is 0, it indicates that the execution of the remaining unit effect is not permitted. When it is determined in the determination process of step S3108 that the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is not 1, (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is 1 (YES), or when it is determined in the determination process of step S3107 described above that the number of completed unit effects is not more than a predetermined number (NO). Selects one of the remaining unit effects, starts execution (step S3109), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3101 described above that it is not the timing at which the unit game has started (NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the unit game has ended (step S3110). When it is determined that it is not the timing when the unit game is finished (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the timing is the end of the unit game (YES), it is determined whether or not there is a unit effect that has already been completed among the plurality of effects (step S3111). When it is determined that the finished unit effect does not exist (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a completed unit effect (YES), the number of completed unit effects is counted (step S3112), and the number is stored in the storage means of the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. (Step S3113), it is determined whether or not the number of completed unit effects is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (step S3114). When it is determined that the number of completed unit effects is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined (YES) that the number of completed unit effects is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, it is determined whether or not the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is 1. (Step S3115). When it is determined that the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is not 1 (NO), the value of the flag F_part_effect_end is set to 1 (step S3116), and this subroutine is terminated.

By executing the above-mentioned process, the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is set to 1 when the first half of the effect is completed. When the QR code is generated after the process of step S3116 described above is executed, the information indicating that the first half of the effect is completed is included in the QR code described above. By including the information indicating that the main effect has been completed in the QR code, it is possible to acquire the game machine server 3100 that the effect of the first half has been completed. The gaming machine server 3100 generates a password by including the permission information for setting the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission described above to 1 in the password based on the acquisition that the first half of the effect has been completed. When the password is entered by the player, the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 sets the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission to 1 based on the permission information included in the password.

By processing in this way, instead of permitting the execution of the second half of the production immediately after the first half of the production is completed, the execution of the second half of the production is permitted after accessing the game machine server 3100 once. Become. In particular, by setting to allow the execution of the latter half of the production after the day after the day when the game machine server 3100 is accessed, it is possible to allow the slot machine 1010 to play the game after the next day. The game can be played continuously. It is possible to increase the chances that the player visits the game store, create an opportunity, and improve or stabilize the operating rate of the slot machine 1010 in the game store.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is 1 (YES), it is determined whether or not all of the unit effects have been executed (step S3117). When it is determined that all of the unit effects have not been executed (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all of the unit effects have been executed (YES), the mission that all of the unit effects have been executed has been cleared. The added value read from the added value storage means 1292 (not shown) is added to the value of the current achievement state information (step S3118), and this subroutine is terminated.

FIG. 34 is a time chart showing an outline of the unit effect to be executed when a plurality of effects are executed. In both the example of FIG. 34 (a) and the example of FIG. 34 (b), when 10 unit games are executed by the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010, each of these 10 unit games is assigned. Correspondingly, the unit effect is executed by the control of the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010.

In the example shown in FIG. 34 (a), the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 executes 10 unit games, and during that time, the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 performs the first to tenth units. This is an example in which the effects are executed in order. In the example shown in FIG. 34 (b), the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 executes 10 unit games, and during that time, the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 performs the first to tenth units. This is an example in which one unit effect to be executed is determined from the effects, and the unit effect is executed.

First, in both the example of FIG. 34 (a) and the example of FIG. 34 (b), it is determined to execute a plurality of effects based on the fact that the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 has won a special role. (Steps S3103 and S3105 in FIG. 31).

In the example shown in FIG. 34 (a), the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 performs the first to sixth units based on the fact that the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 executes the unit game six times. The six unit effects of are executed in order as the first half of the effects. When the sixth unit effect is executed, the value of the flag F_part_effect_end is set to 1 assuming that the first half effect is completed (steps S3114 and S3116 in FIG. 31).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 34 (b), based on the fact that the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 executes the unit game six times, the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 is the first to the first. The sixth six unit effects are executed as the first half of the effects. As described above, in the first to sixth six unit effects, one unit effect to be executed is determined each time from the first to tenth unit effects. When the sixth unit effect is executed, the value of the flag F_part_effect_end is set to 1 assuming that the first half effect is completed (steps S3114 and S3116 in FIG. 31).

As described above, when the QR code is generated after the value of the flag F_part_effect_end is set to 1, the QR code described above includes information indicating that the first half of the effect has been completed. After that, the information included in the QR code is transmitted to the gaming machine server 3100 via the mobile phone 2100. By doing so, the gaming machine server 3100 can acquire that the first half of the production has been completed.

After that, the gaming machine server 3100 generates the password by including the information for permitting the second half of the production in the password based on the acquisition that the first half of the production has been completed. When the password is entered into the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 by the player, the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 uses the flag F_remain_effect_permission based on the information included in the password to allow the latter half of the effect. Set the value of to 1. Based on the fact that the value of the flag F_remain_effect_permission is set to 1, the execution of the second half effect is started (step S3109 in FIG. 31).

With this configuration, after the first half of the production is completed, instead of immediately executing the second half of the production, the gaming machine server 3100 is accessed and the gaming machine server 3100 is permitted to execute the second half of the production. After that, the second half of the production is executed. In this way, by adding access to the game machine server 3100 to the conditions for executing the second half of the production, it is possible to increase the chances of playing a game on the slot machine 1010 and create an opportunity to use the slot machine 1010. It is possible to increase the operating rate at the installed amusement store.
<< Continuous production execution processing >>
FIG. 32 is a subroutine showing a process for executing the continuous effect. As described above, the continuous effect is an effect in which a plurality of unit effects are executed in a predetermined order and is associated with each other, and a rare effect that may be rarely executed is included in the plurality of unit effects. Can be

First, it is determined whether or not the betting operation has been performed by the player (step S3201). This determination is a process of determining whether or not the 1-bet switch 1062, the 2-bet switch 1064, or the maximum bet switch 1066 has been operated by the player.

When it is determined that the betting operation has been performed (YES), it is determined whether or not the previous production is being continued (step S3202). When it is determined that the previous production is being continued, the production is interrupted (step S3203).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3202 described above that the previous production is not continued (NO), or when the process of step S3203 is executed, this subroutine is immediately terminated. In this way, by the player performing the betting operation, even if another effect has already been performed, the player can immediately prepare to start the continuous effect and stand by.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3201 described above that the betting operation has not been performed by the player (NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the unit game is started (step S3204). When it is determined (YES) that it is the timing when the unit game is started, it is determined whether or not the process of this continuous effect has already been executed (step S3205). When it is determined (NO) that the continuous production process has not been executed yet, it is determined whether or not a predetermined combination has been won by the combination lottery process of the combination lottery means 1120 of the main control means 1100 (step). S3206). When it is determined that the predetermined combination has not been won (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the predetermined combination has been won (YES), it is determined whether or not the content of the mission has not been decided yet (step S3207). When it is determined that the content of the mission has not been decided yet (YES), the content of the mission is determined according to the winning combination (step S3208).

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3207 described above that the content of the mission has already been determined (NO), or when the process of step S3208 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the continuous effect. (Step S3209). When it is determined that it has not been decided to execute the continuous effect (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined (YES) that it is decided to execute the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not to execute the rare effect that is rarely executed (step S3210). In this process, for example, a random number may be generated, and it may be determined whether or not to execute the rare effect according to the value of the random number. Further, in the process of step S3210, when it is determined to execute the rare effect, the timing for executing the rare effect is also determined.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3205 described above that the continuous effect process has already been executed (YES), or when the process of step S3210 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the rare effect. (Step S3211). When it is determined that it is not the timing to execute the rare effect (NO), a normal effect is selected as the next effect (step S3212), and this subroutine is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing to execute the rare effect (YES), the rare effect is selected as the next effect (step S3213), and this subroutine is terminated.

When it is determined in the determination process of step S3204 described above that it is not the timing at which the unit game has started (NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the unit game has ended (step S3214). When it is determined that it is not the timing when the unit game is finished (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.

When it is determined that the unit game has ended (YES), it is determined whether or not all of the continuous effects have been executed (step S3215), and when it is determined that all of the continuous effects have not been executed (step S3215). NO) immediately terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that all of the continuous effects have been executed (YES), the mission that the continuous effects have been completed has been cleared. Therefore, the addition value corresponding to this mission is added to the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. The value is read from the value storage means 1292, the added value read is added to the value of the current achievement status information (step S3216), and this subroutine is terminated.

FIG. 35 is a time chart showing an outline of the unit effect to be executed when the continuous effect is executed. In both the example of FIG. 35 (a) and the example of FIG. 35 (b), when 10 unit games are executed by the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010, each of these 10 unit games is assigned. Correspondingly, the unit effect is executed by the control of the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010.

The example shown in FIG. 35A is an example in which the sub-control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010 executes the normal effects (effects 7 to 10) in the latter half. In the case of the example of FIG. 35 (a), it is determined that the continuous effect is executed based on the fact that the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 wins the special combination (step S3206 and step S3206 of FIG. 32). S3208), after that, in the process of step S3210, it is determined not to execute the rare effect.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 35B is an example in which the rare effect (effect 7'to effect 10') is executed in the latter half by the sub control means 1200 of the slot machine 1010. In the case of the example of FIG. 35 (b), it is determined to execute the continuous effect based on the fact that the main control means 1100 of the slot machine 1010 wins the special combination (steps S3206 and S3208 of FIG. 32). After that, in the process of step S3210, it is decided to execute the rare effect.

By executing such a process, it is possible to make it a condition of the mission that the rare effect is executed, and the player needs to continue the game until the rare effect is executed. It is possible to maintain or improve the operating rate of the gaming machine by actively playing the game.
<Additional notes>
The problems to be solved by the invention according to the claims (initial invention) at the time of filing the application of the present application, the means for solving the problems, and the effects of the original invention are as follows.
(A) Problems to be solved by the initial invention Conventionally, a slump graph or the like can be displayed on a gaming machine, but the data shown by the slump graph shows the results of past games played on the gaming machine. It was merely shown or shown with some statistical processing, and could not be displayed for each player or for each player. In addition, since a storage medium that can be directly operated and managed by the player is not installed, even the result displayed as a slump graph cannot be saved, and the player can play the game for a long time. Of course, it is not possible to save the history of the game on a recording medium, etc. It was extremely difficult to reflect it again.

For example, even if the same type of gaming machines are installed in one gaming store, the history of the games played by one gaming machine cannot be transferred to another different gaming machine, and one gaming machine. Even if you play a game for a long time and accumulate enough game history in one game machine, the game history cannot be reflected in other game machines, and new games are played in other game machines. Had to proceed. For this reason, it is difficult for a player to inform other players that he / she is sufficiently skilled or has sufficient experience with the gaming machine, and he / she is likely to fall into frustration as a player. rice field.

However, if the player is configured to be able to input and output various types of information to and from the gaming machine simply by interposing a storage medium or the like, some fraudulent activity can be performed by processing the information stored in the storage medium. Since there is a possibility that it can be done, it is fully assumed that unfairness will occur among the players and that the situation will be unfavorable.

In addition, there are some that try to continuously attract the player to the game by performing a continuous production with a story, but when the progress of the game and the production are simply compared, the result of the game It seems that there are few players who try to execute the production even at the expense of.

The original invention was made in view of the above points, and the purpose of the invention is to allow a game to be transferred to another game machine so that the history of the game played by one game machine can be transferred to another game machine. In addition to managing the history of pachinko machines, we prevent fraudulent activities to prevent unfairness among players, and by performing continuous and continuous productions, we can continue to play games. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine system capable of maintaining the operating rate of the gaming machine.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems In order to achieve the above object, in the original invention, in response to the transmission of the termination information, the predetermined production among the associated productions is followed. Generates successor effect permission information that permits execution of the succeeding effect to be executed.

Specifically, the gaming machine system according to the original invention is
A gaming machine system including a gaming machine capable of advancing a game based on a player's operation and an external processing means for executing processing related to the game performed by the gaming machine.
The gaming machine
A production means for notifying game information related to the game, and
Based on the progress of the game, the effect control means for executing the effect associated with a predetermined relationship in the effect means, and the effect control means.
Includes an end information generating means that generates end information based on the execution of a predetermined effect among the associated effects.
The external processing means generates successor effect permission information that permits execution of a successor effect to be executed following the predetermined effect of the associated effects in response to the transmission of the end information. It is characterized by including a means for generating permission information.

The gaming machine system according to the above-mentioned initial invention includes a gaming machine and an external processing means. The gaming machine is capable of advancing the game, and the gaming is performed based on the operation of the player. The external processing means executes processing related to the game performed on the gaming machine.

The gaming machine includes an effect means, an effect control means, and an end information generation means. The directing means is for notifying the game information about the game. The game information may be information about the game and may be explicit or suggestive to the player. The effect control means controls the effect to be executed in the effect means based on the progress of the game. This effect is associated with a predetermined relationship. The end information generation means generates end information based on the execution of a predetermined effect among the associated effects.

The external processing means includes permission information generating means for generating successor effect permission information. The successor effect permission information is information for permitting execution of a successor effect that is executed following a predetermined effect among the associated effects in response to the transmission of the end information. That is, the associated effect includes a predetermined effect and a successor effect executed following the predetermined effect. As for the order of processing, first, a predetermined effect is executed in the gaming machine, thereby generating end information. Next, the end information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the external processing means. The external processing means receives the transmitted end information, generates successor effect permission information, and transmits it to the gaming machine. The gaming machine receives the transmitted successor effect permission information and executes the successor effect to be executed following the predetermined effect. As described above, the successor effect is not executed unless the end information is transmitted to the external processing means and the successor effect permission information is generated by the external processing means.

By doing so, the successor effect is not executed unless the predetermined effect is executed. Further, since the successor effect is associated with the predetermined effect, in order for the player to visually recognize or recognize the successor effect, the predetermined effect is first executed, and then the external process is temporarily performed. The successor production permission information must be received from the means. By making the timing at which the predetermined effect can be recognized and the timing at which the successor effect can be recognized different in this way, the player has to play again in order to recognize the successor effect. This makes it possible to increase the chances that the player visits the game store, so that the operating rate of the game store can be increased.

In addition, the gaming machine system according to the initial invention
The external processing means can be accessed by information mediation means that can be manipulated by the player.
It is preferable that the information mediating means acquires the ending information from the gaming machine and transmits it to the external processing means based on the operation of the player.

Since the end information is transmitted from the gaming machine to the external processing means via the information mediating means, the end information can be easily and easily transmitted.

Furthermore, the gaming machine system according to the original invention
The gaming machine generates access information including location information indicating the location of the external processing means and the end information.
It is preferable that the information mediating means acquires the access information from the gaming machine and accesses the external processing means indicated by the location information based on the operation of the player.

Since the location information and the end information are included in the access information, the processing can be simplified and the handling of the information can be simplified.

Furthermore, the gaming machine system according to the original invention
It is preferable that the external processing means transmits the successor effect permission information to the information mediating means in response to the access from the information mediating means.

Since the successor production permission information is also transmitted and received via the information mediating means, the processing can be facilitated and simplified.

In addition, the gaming machine system according to the initial invention
The successor effect permission information transmitted to the information mediating means can be input to the gaming machine by the operation of the player.
It is preferable that the successor effect is executed based on the progress of the game performed after the successor effect permission information is input.

Since the successor production permission information is input to the gaming machine by the operation of the player, the successor production permission information is not directly transmitted to the game machine, so that the amount of information to be handled can be limited, which is illegal. It is possible to make it difficult to input a large amount of information and prevent fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, the gaming machine system according to the original invention
The external processing means
Achievement status information storage means that stores achievement status information that is information indicating the achievement status of the game and is changed by satisfying a predetermined achievement condition determined according to the progress of the game.
It is preferable to include an achievement state information changing means for determining that the achievement condition is satisfied and changing the achievement state information when the successor effect is completed.

The external processing means includes the achievement state information storage means and the achievement state information changing means. The achievement status information storage means stores the achievement status information. The achievement status information is information that is changed by at least one of the change of the "game progress information" described later and the clearing of the "progress establishment condition". For example, it is a parameter that is changed by at least one of the state of "game history" and "clearing the mission".

The above-mentioned "game progress information" is history information indicating the history of the played game, and refers to information that inevitably changes as the game progresses. In particular, those that are changed immediately as the game progresses are preferable. By doing so, the progress of the game can be reflected immediately. For example, there are the number of times a unit game is played and the number of times a special role is won. Further, the "progress establishment condition" refers to a condition determined according to at least one of the progress of the game and the progress of the effect performed based on the progress of the game. When the game or the production is advanced, it is determined that the condition determined as the "progress establishment condition" is satisfied, so that the "progress establishment condition" is cleared and the satisfaction information is generated.

It is assumed that the achievement status information changing means satisfies the predetermined achievement condition when the successor production is completed. This changes the achievement status information. In this way, by setting the achievement condition that the successor production has been executed, the achievement status information is changed only after all the productions are completed. Therefore, in order to change the achievement status information, the player can change the achievement status information. Since the game is continuously performed in order to finish all the productions, it is possible to improve or maintain the operating rate of the game machine in the game store.

Furthermore, the gaming machine system according to the original invention
The associated effect comprises a plurality of unit effects performed in a predetermined order.
The effect control means executes a predetermined unit effect of the plurality of unit effects as the predetermined effect.
When the end information generating means executes the one unit effect, the end information is generated.
It is preferable that the effect control means executes another unit game to be executed following the one unit effect as the successor effect based on the successor effect permission information.

In addition, the gaming machine system according to the initial invention
The associated effect comprises a plurality of unit effects.
The effect control means executes a selected unit from the plurality of unit effects,
It is preferable that the end information generation means generates end information when the number of unit effects executed by the effect control means reaches a predetermined number.

The unit production is a production that is a basic unit for composing the production. Even if it is configured so that one unit effect is performed when one unit game is performed, it is configured so that two or more unit effects are performed when one unit game is performed. May be good. As described above, the unit game and the unit production are not limited by the relationship between the number of the unit productions constituting the unit game as long as the correspondence is clearly defined. For example, in one unit game, one unit effect may be executed, and in another unit game, two or more unit effects may be executed. For example, the type and number of corresponding unit effects may be different depending on whether or not the winning combination is won, or the type and number of corresponding unit effects may be different depending on the type of winning combination.

In this way, by generating the end information according to the number of unit effects, the number of executed unit effects may be counted, so that the process of generating the end information can be facilitated.

Furthermore, the gaming machine system according to the original invention
The associated effect comprises a plurality of unit effects.
It is preferable that the achievement state information changing means determines that the achievement condition is satisfied and changes the achievement state information when all of the plurality of unit effects have been executed.

In this way, if all the unit effects are not executed, the achievement condition is not satisfied. Therefore, the player who intends to change the achievement status information continues the game until all the unit effects are completed. It is possible to increase or maintain the operating rate of gaming machines in stores.

Furthermore, the gaming machine system according to the original invention
Including a combination lottery means for performing a lottery process for a combination used in the game.
The effect control means
When the state of winning a predetermined role is maintained, the associated effect is continuously executed.
When the winning state of a predetermined combination is not maintained, it is preferable to interrupt the continuous execution of the associated effect.

By doing so, when the winning state is not maintained, the continuous execution of the production is interrupted. Therefore, when the production is continued to the end, for example, the achievement status information is obtained by completing the production to the end. When it is possible to change, the player will continue to play the game so that the winning state will be maintained, so it is possible to maintain the operating rate of the gaming machine by increasing the number of games played. can.

Furthermore, the gaming machine system according to the original invention
Including a combination lottery means for performing a lottery process for a combination used in the game.
The effect control means
When the game is being played while the state of winning a predetermined combination is maintained, the plurality of unit effects are executed according to the predetermined order.
When the game is played by shifting from the state in which a predetermined combination is won to the state in which the player is not won, it is preferable to interrupt the execution of the plurality of unit effects.

Here, "transition from a state in which a predetermined winning combination is won to a state in which a predetermined winning combination is not won" means, for example, a case where a predetermined winning combination is won. By doing so, the player can maintain the operating rate of the gaming machine by increasing the number of games played by continuously playing the game so that the winning state is maintained. Can be done.

Further, even if the unit game is finished (three reels are stopped and the payout process is finished), the production may continue. In such a case, it is preferable that the player can interrupt the game at his / her will. For example, when the player operates the bet switch, the preparation for starting the next unit game is started, so that the continuous production can be ended. In this way, since the production can be interrupted, the unit games can be sequentially performed, so that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, when performing a continuous effect, it may be branched into a so-called rare effect that is rarely executed from the middle, and the completion of the rare effect may be set as an achievement condition for changing the achievement status information. By doing so, the game is played until the rare effect is executed, so that the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.
(C) Effect of the original invention The history of games played on one gaming machine can be transferred to another different gaming machine, and the history of games can be managed and fraudulent activities can be prevented. By preventing unfairness between the players and further performing continuous production and continuous production, it is possible to continuously perform the game and maintain the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Application Example 1 (Modification Example 1):
FIG. 36 shows a smartphone and installed applications. FIG. 37 shows that the mobile phone 2100 of the mobile phone communication system 2000 shown in FIG. 1 has been changed to a plurality of smartphones 2101a to 2101n. Therefore, the functions already described for the mobile phone 2100 can be replaced with a plurality of smartphones 2101a to 2101n as they are, and all the explanations are used.

The smartphone 2101 shown in FIG. 36 (A) has all the functions of the mobile phone 2100 described above, and the installed application is displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the form of a plurality of icons. The application software provided by the applicant of the present application includes "my slot", and since the software is installed on the smartphone 2101, my slot icon 2101A is displayed on the screen (FIG. 36). (A) The third icon from the bottom left).

FIG. 36B shows my slot icon 2101A installed on the smartphone 2101. The game machine server 3100 described above can transmit a push notification to the smartphone 2101 via the packet network 2300 or the network 3200, and notifies that the set value notification mission has been won. When the smartphone 2101 receives the push notification, the smartphone 2101 displays the line notification on the upper stage of the liquid crystal screen and then displays that the push notification has been received. The right figure of FIG. 36 (B) shows that only one push notification was received from the gaming machine server 3100 by the numerical value on the right shoulder of my slot icon 2101A.

38 to 44 show the display screen of the smartphone.

The game machine server 3100 has made it possible for the user registered in the slot machine to know the actual setting of the slot machine (the setting value notification mission was won by lottery, or the setting value was set by a predetermined method. Notification mission has been decided) will be announced by push notification. When the owner of the smartphone 2101 taps the icon shown in the right figure of FIG. 36 (B), the notification screen of my slot application (see FIG. 38 (A)) is displayed, and the notifications received in the order of newest from the top are displayed. do. As a predetermined method, I may notify you when I access the slot. In that case, since it leads to the discovery of sleep users, it is possible to raise awareness of the model by accessing it every day. As the latest announcement, "Pachislot new model setting value notification mission winning" is displayed.

When the owner of the smartphone 2101 taps "Latest notification" in the state of FIG. 38 (A), the details of the notification are displayed (see FIG. 38 (B)). As a notice from my slot machine, "The setting value notification mission for the new pachislot machine has been won". When you complete the missions for each model below, the true set value (actually set set value) will be announced up to 6 times.
● "Yamishibai 2" Mission 1
● "Cross 5" Mission 2
● "GATE2" Mission 3
● "Cinderella Braid 4" Mission 4 is the content of the announcement.

When the owner of the smartphone 2101 taps the password issuance icon in the state shown in FIG. 38 (B), the process proceeds to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 (A) is a password issuance target model list screen, in which a plurality of pachislot models are released in order from the top, such as "Yamishibai 2", "Cross 5", "GATE2", and "Cinderella Braid 4". New models are displayed in order from top to bottom.

When the owner of the smartphone 2101 taps the Yamishibai 2 icon at the top in the state of FIG. 39 (A), the process shifts to FIG. 39 (B). The smartphone 2101 and the game machine server 3100 communicate with each other according to a predetermined password issuing protocol and mission issuing protocol via the base station 2200, the packet network 2300, and the network 3200, and the game machine server 3100 notifies the password and the mission. do. As a matter of course, the gaming machine server 3100 recognizes that the accessed smartphone 2101 has won the set value notification mission for four models, and when issuing the password and the mission, the password is different for each of the four models. And create missions individually. For example, when the gaming machine server 3100 creates (1) 256 game digestion, (2) BB winning, or (3) RB winning as the password "Nerohi" and the mission for "Yamishibai 2", the smartphone 2101 Send to.

When the smartphone 2101 receives the password and the mission from the pachinko / pachislot machine server 3100, the setting value notification mission regarding "Yamishibai 2" is set as the password "Nerohi" and the mission condition (1) 256 games by the I-suro application. Indicates that either digestion, (2) BB winning, or (3) RB winning has been achieved.

Similarly, when the owner of the smartphone 2101 taps the second cross 5 icon from the top in the state of FIG. 39 (A), the process shifts to FIG. 40 (A). The smartphone 2101 and the gaming machine server 3100 perform the above-mentioned predetermined communication to notify the password and the mission. The set value notification mission for "Cross 5" must achieve either (1) 300 game digestion, (2) cherry winning 10 times, or (3) watermelon winning 20 times as the password "Yomanuwo" and mission conditions. Is displayed.

Similarly, when the owner of the smartphone 2101 taps the Cinderella Braid 4 icon at the bottom in the state of FIG. 39 (A), the process shifts to FIG. 40 (B). The smartphone 2101 and the gaming machine server 3100 perform the above-mentioned predetermined communication to notify the password and the mission. The set value notification mission for "Cinderella Braid 4" achieves either (1) 256 game digestion, (2) pseudo BB winning once, or (3) pseudo RB winning twice as the password "Masatsuhoha" and mission conditions. Display that. Although not shown, when you tap the GATE2 icon, the set value notification mission related to "GATE2" will be set to the password "Mememememera" and the mission conditions will be (1) 200 game digestion, (2) BB winning once, or (3) It is displayed that any one of the RB winnings has been achieved.

One of the mobile applications is, for example, LINE, and by downloading it to the smartphone 2101, messages can be exchanged between people who have the line. The owner of smartphone 2101 and his friends A to N form a pachislot group. The owner of smartphone 2101 uses LINE to tell friends A to N, "The pachislot setting value notification mission of Net Inc. has been won. The setting value will be taught up to 6 times. Today, everyone Let's hit the net company's pachislot. "

In addition, when the owner of the smartphone 2101 creates (1) 256 game digestion, (2) BB winning, or (3) RB winning as the password "Nerohi" and the mission for "Pachislot Yamishibai 2", Contact smartphone 2101. Regarding "Cross 5", we will inform you that you have achieved either (1) 300 game digestion, (2) cherry winning 10 times, or (3) watermelon winning 20 times as the password "Yomanuwo" and mission conditions (Fig.) 41 (A)).

Then, the owner of the smartphone 2101 can use either (1) 200 game digestion, (2) BB winning once, or (3) RB winning once as the password for "GATE2" and the mission condition. Notify that it is an achievement. For "Cinderella Braid 4", the password must be "Masatsuhoha" and the mission condition must be either (1) 256 game digestion, (2) pseudo BB winning once, or (3) pseudo RB winning twice. Contact us (see Figure 41 (B)).

Finally, the owner of the smartphone 2101 will contact "Members who have completed the mission should put the QR code or URL here" (see FIG. 42 (A)). Friend A to Friend N, who make up the pachislot group, have announced that they will each participate in the "Internet Pachislot Setting Value Notification Mission" won by the owner of the smartphone 2101 (see Fig. 42 (A)). .. As a matter of course, since the same exchanges are displayed on the display screens of the smartphones owned by friends A to N, each person can recognize the password corresponding to each model.

The owner of smartphone 2101 and his friends A to N have already registered as members and entered their profiles, so they can play "my slot", and the "darkness" of the model that won the set value notification mission. Decide one of "Play 2", "Cross 5", "GATE 2" or "Cinderella Braid 4", enter the issued password into the pachislot machine, and start the game. Not only the owner of the smartphone 2101 but also the friends A to N can play the set value notification mission by inputting the issued password for each model.

Each of the four pachislot machines can generate game execution information on the condition that the mission is completed by the player when the password for the set value notification mission is input. Game machine server 3100 (external processing means) Access information (for example, URL) including at least the location information indicating the location of the machine and the setting value information related to the setting value actually set for playing the game can be generated and acquired by the smartphone 2101 (information mediation means). It is displayed on the image display device 1034 in an aspect (for example, a QR code). Simply put, the QR code contains at least the URL and the "actual settings".

Friend K cleared the mission by achieving the cherry winning 10 times on the cross 5, and pasted the QR code as it is. In addition, friend C cleared the mission by digesting 256 games with Simbre 4, converted the QR code into a URL, and pasted it (see FIG. 42 (A)).

When the owner of the smartphone 2101 converts the QR code of the cross 5 into a URL, accesses the game machine server 3100 and transfers the data, the game machine server 3100 is the owner of the smartphone 2101 in which the set value notification mission is won. It recognizes that there is a setting value in the transferred data, and sends a push notification including this setting value information. Further, when the owner of the smartphone 2101 accesses the game machine server 3100 by the URL of the symbre 4 and transfers the data, the game machine server 3100 is the owner of the smartphone 2101 for which the set value notification mission is won. At the same time as recognizing, the setting value in the transferred data is recognized, and a push notification including this setting value information is transmitted.

FIG. 43 (A) is the same as the smartphone 2101 shown in FIG. 36 (A). When the smartphone 2101 receives two push notifications, the smartphone 2101 displays a line notification on the upper part of the liquid crystal screen and then receives the push notification. Display that. The right figure of FIG. 43 (B) shows that two push notifications were received from the gaming machine server 3100 by the numerical value on the right shoulder of my slot icon 2101A. When this push notification is opened, information that can display the actually set value for the model is transmitted.

If my slot app is running, convert the QR code of the cross 5 to a URL or read the URL of the symbre 4 and access the gaming machine server 3100 to transfer the data. After that, as will be described later in FIG. 44 (B) or FIG. 44 (C), the "Notice from I-Slot" screen can be directly displayed.

The game machine server 3100 notifies the owner of the smartphone 2101 who won the setting value notification mission by push notification that the actual setting of the corresponding slot machine has become known (see FIG. 44 (A)). The first push notification that came is the second notification from the top, and it is displayed as "About the notification of the set value of the pachislot cross 5". The last push notification that came is the top notification, and it says "About my slot" Pachislot Cinderella Braid 4 setting value notification "".

When you tap the push notification icon that came first, the content of the notification will be displayed. It can be seen that the contents are "This is the time." And "●" Cross 5 "setting value 1". In particular, the gaming machine server 3100 stores the maximum number of notifications of 6 times, and since it has notified once, subtracts 1 to notify that the remaining number of times is 5 (stores the remaining number of times of 5). Further, it is found that the set value of the cross 5, which is the player's greatest concern, is 1, which is the lowest value. The owner who is the winner informs friend A to friend N that the cross 5 actually played by friend K is the set value 1. Friend K is thought to move immediately to another pachislot machine out of the four models.

When you tap the push notification icon that came last, the content of the notification will be displayed. It can be seen that the contents are "4 times." And "●" Cinderella Braid 4 "setting value 6". In particular, the gaming machine server 3100 stores the remaining number of notifications of 5 times, and since it has notified once, subtracts 1 to notify that the remaining number of times is 4. Further, it is found that the set value of Cinderella braid 4, which is the player's greatest concern, is 6, which is the maximum value. The winner, the owner, informs friends A to N that the Cinderella Braid 4 that friend C is actually playing is a set value of 6. Friend C is expected to continue hitting this Cinderella Braid 4 with confidence.

Even if friend K or friend C accesses the URL as the owner of smartphone 2101 did, the smartphone of friend K or friend C (another information mediation means different from the first information mediation means) is a smartphone. Since it is different from 2101, the gaming machine server 3100 makes it impossible to display the actually set set value. For example, "You have not won the set value notification mission, so you cannot notify the set value." Is displayed on the screen. That is, the gaming machine server 3100 does not notify the set value.

Hereinafter, it is a mechanism that makes it easy for a specific player to determine the internal state.

What you need is a mobile interlocking system (I slot), and you can identify the user when reading the password in my slot. The aim is to increase the motivation of the game by issuing a password that works in the player's favor.

As a series of steps, I will randomly announce to the player that it will be easier to determine the internal state. It becomes easier for the player to determine the setting. Only on the day of the game, it is difficult to be selected with a probability, which leads to the motivation for the game. As usual, the player issues a password from my slot and plays the game. When the game is played, it is announced that the internal state can be determined with a certain probability (announcement in the mission). The probability itself can be changed by the path. If the path is read from the actual machine after receiving the notification, the internal state of the actual machine can be determined. If you read the path and access my slot, it will suggest the setting of the model you were hitting.

I-suro server: Notifies (lottery) that the settings can be understood by the users who are registered as I-suro from I-suro. The notification method is a mechanism that allows notification without access like PUSH notification. I can find sleep users and notify me when I access the slot. Access it every day to raise awareness of the model. The user goes to the hall and enters a specific password in my slot, but the model with the specific password announces the achievement of the mission according to the conditions. At that time, setting information is added to the QR code that is discharged. The user reads the QR code and accesses my slot server. I will link with the user in the slot server, and if it can be linked, the setting information will be announced.

The number of times limit is set in my slot server so that the login account cannot be turned around. Select more special users by preparing multiple difficulty levels for completing missions. If this is the case, such as when announcing at 1/100 or when announcing at 1/50, I think I'll try. You can give a specific user a pass that is valid only on the day. By linking with the inside of my slot server, it can be played by anyone other than a specific user. Since my slot server will be the start of the flow, the number of winnings can be adjusted according to the operating status and reaction. The day with 0 at the end, every Friday, the winner will be doubled, or the winner will be notified by lottery twice in the morning and evening.

Application Example 2 (Modification Example 2 in which the following functions are added to Example 1):
The second embodiment in which the following functions are added to the first embodiment will be described in detail, but the second embodiment alone is novel and has an inventive step.

FIG. 45 is a front view showing the front surface of the slot machine 1010 according to the present embodiment (modification embodiment) as in FIG. The difference from FIG. 4 is that the setting mode display unit 1040b is provided on the lower panel 1040a on the front side (player side) of the front door 1040. Therefore, the description of FIG. 4 is used for other explanations.

As described above, the setting mode display unit 1040b (see FIG. 45A) is a set value (or set value) for setting a lottery table to be used when performing the winning combination lottery process by an operation by a person such as an administrator. It is a display unit that displays information related to), and a display such as an LED or LCE is used. The main control means 1100 transmits a set value (or a step set value) to the sub control means 1200 every time the setting is changed or one game is started by the start operation. The main control means 1100 attaches a checksum to detect an error in the set value and sends it to the sub control means 1200, and the sub control means 1200 receives and error-checks the correct set value (true set value) as a value 1. It is memorized in 6 steps of ~ value 6.

The sub-control means 1200 has two set values of 1, 3, 5 and an odd value, and when the set value is any of 2, 4 and 6 and an even value. The emission color of the setting mode display unit 1040b is controlled to a different color by distinguishing the states. Specifically, when the set value is an odd number, when the LED is made to emit blue light (first color), the blue light is transmitted, so that the setting mode display unit 1040b displays "Standard" in blue letters. "Mode" is displayed (see FIG. 45 (B)). On the other hand, when the set value is an even number, if the LED is made to emit red light (a second color different from the first color), the red light is transmitted, so that the setting mode display unit 1040b displays red characters. Is displayed as "Professional Mode" (see FIG. 45 (C)). That is, the sub control means 1200 determines whether the set value received from the main control means 1100 is an even number or an odd number, and when the set value is an odd number, the LED is made to emit blue light to set the standard (beginner mode). While the blue letters that mean are highlighted, the red letters that mean skilled (professional mode) are highlighted by making the LED emit red light when the set value is even. As will be described later, the difficulty level of the eye-pressing differs depending on whether the set value is odd or even, and the benefits to be obtained differ depending on the success or failure of the eye-pressing, so the instruction function is activated continuously. By doing so, the winning probability of a pseudo-bonus (special game: ART (assist replay time) or AT (assist time), which is called the third bonus), the additional performance of the number of games, or the number of acquired balls The additional performance will be affected. In addition, since the pseudo bonus is technically common sense by those skilled in the art, detailed explanation is incorporated or omitted. Further, in the sub control means 1200, the set value is any one of 1, 2 and 3 and a low value (low setting), and the set value is any one of 4, 5 and 6 and a high value (high setting). In this case, the two states may be distinguished and the emission color of the setting mode display unit 1040b may be controlled to a different color. For example, if the low setting is displayed in red and the high setting is displayed in blue, the player selects the gaming machine that shines in blue, so that it is not necessary to search for the high setting gaming machine.

Further, if the setting suggestion is easily given only for a specific one hour (for example, 10:00 to 11:00 or 11:00 to 12:00), the operation from the morning can be increased. For example, when the set value is an odd number, the LED is made to emit blue light (first color) and the blue light is transmitted, so that the setting mode display unit 1040b is described as "Standard Mode" in blue characters. What was displayed (see FIG. 45 (B)) is displayed in blue letters as "Standard Mode 3 ↑" at 10:30, and returns to the original display at 11 o'clock. On the other hand, when the set value is an even number, the LED is made to emit red light (a second color different from the first color) and the red light is transmitted, so that the setting mode display unit 1040b has red characters. What was displayed as "Professional Mode" in (see Fig. 45 (C)) is displayed as "Professional Mode 3 ↑" in red letters at 10:30, and returns to the original display at 11 o'clock. ..

46 and 47 are a design layout of the drum and the like.

Although the design itself and the number of frames are 20 frames different from those in FIG. 6, FIGS. 46 (A) and 47 show the left drum 2a (first drum), the middle drum 2b (second drum), and the right. On each of the drums 2c (third drum), a rotating drum band (not shown) on which the left drum symbol, the middle drum symbol, and the right drum symbol are drawn is attached so as to go around the outer periphery of each drum. ing. Since the relationship between the step and the frame position described in FIG. 6 only needs to be multiplied by 21/20, the explanation is used. For example, in the case of 360 steps of symbol number 15, it is 378 steps (the same applies to the others).

FIG. 46B shows the types of symbols on each reel, and the number of types of symbols is 10 in total. The left drum 2a (1st torso) has 9 types of symbols excluding the middle-less cherry symbol, and the middle drum 2b (2nd torso) has 8 types of symbols excluding the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol. Nine kinds of symbols except the location bra symbol (rocket blank symbol) are arranged on the right drum 2c (third body) as shown in FIG. 46 (A). When the player operates any of the three stop switches 1044a, 1044b and 1044c, the main control means 1100 transmits the symbol numbers 0 to 19 at the middle position of each reel to the sub control means 1200.

Of particular importance here are the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol arranged on the left drum 2a (1st torso) and the right drum 2c (3rd torso), and this symbol is one symbol in two frames. It is a design that seems to compose (Big pie design). Specifically, there is one pink symbol that represents the face and body of the main character, and by dividing it in the upper and lower halves to compose one symbol with two symbols, the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol, 1 It is a design for pressing the set (pressing design). As will be described later, there is a role for pressing (small combination or replaying combination), and when the set value is an odd number, the odd-numbered pressing combination is won, but the even-numbered pressing combination is not won. .. On the other hand, when the set value is an even number, the even numbered pusher is won, but the odd numbered pusher is not won. When the set value is an odd number, the standard mode (beginner mode) allows the number of frames to be drawn in up to one frame, but when the set value is an even number, the skill mode (professional mode) is used. The number of frames to be pulled in is designed to allow only 0-frame slippage with a bitter push. It should be noted that the number of pull-in frames in the standard mode may be allowed up to 2 frames slip, and the number of pull-in frames in the skill mode may be allowed up to 1 frame slip. Further, the number of pull-in frames in the standard mode may be allowed up to 3 frames slip, and the number of pull-in frames in the skill mode may be allowed up to 0 frames slip. That is, the number of pull-in frames in the standard mode should be larger than the number of pull-in frames in the skill mode.

46 (C) and 46 (D) are combination display determination diagrams of symbols, and the main control means 1100 has a window corresponding to the number of inserted game medals when all three reels of the drum unit 2 are stopped. On the effective line of the part 3 (in this case, the number of inserted sheets is always 3 and only the irregular line), the combination display determination of the symbols related to the winning and the operation is performed. That is, in all games, three cards are always inserted, and the effective line is the irregular first line (the left drum 2a is the middle stage, the middle drum 2b is the upper stage, and the right drum 2c is the lower stage).

FIG. 48 is a concept of a lottery table.

The difference from the lottery table shown in FIG. 9 (a) is that all the single winning areas of the first-class BB combination, the second-class BB combination, the RB combination, the CB combination, and the SB combination are eliminated, and the re-game combination is won. The area and the small winning area are the winning areas, and the RB winning combination is simultaneously won in some of the small winning areas (see FIG. 48 (A)). As small roles that the RB role wins at the same time, rare small roles (cherry role, watermelon role, chance role: each has strength and weakness), push order 1 small role as duplicate winning role, and pushing as duplicate winning role There is one small role. Even if the RB combination is internally elected, the winning probability of the re-game combination remains unchanged at about 1 / 7.3 (8978/65536), and the lottery for the RB combination is not executed (FIG. 48 (Fig. 48). See B)). The winning probability of any of the small wins is about 86.3% (56558/65536). Although not specified in the figure, other small wins include push order bells 1 to push order bells 12, common bells, etc., and when the bell role wins, there are 9 payouts. If you miss the bell role by operating the wrong answer with the push order bell, one small winning combination, which is an obstructing small winning combination, will be awarded (one payout) or non-winning. The size of these regions is determined based on the number set described in FIG.

49 and 50 are detailed explanatory views of a combination for pushing a button (replaying combination or small combination).

FIG. 49 (A) shows a replay combination for pressing (pressing replay combination), and replays 1 to 4 are won with an odd number of set values (there is an odd number), while the set value is an even number. (No number, see Fig. 50 (A)). On the contrary, in Replay 5 to Replay 8, the set value is an even number and the winning is performed (there is a number), while the set value is an odd number and the winning is not performed (there is no number. See FIG. 50 (A)). FIG. 49B shows a one-sheet small winning combination (pressing small winning combination) for pressing, and one small winning combination 1 to one small winning combination 2 are won with an odd number of set values (there is an even number). On the other hand, the set value is an even number and the player does not win (there is no odd number. See FIG. 50 (B)). On the contrary, the 1-card small winning combination 3 to the 1-card small winning combination 4 wins with an even number of set values (with a number), while the set value is an odd number and does not win (there is no number. See FIG. 50 (B)).

The replay 1 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAY) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of seven types of REPLAYs: RPLAY1, RPLAY2, RPLAY3, RPLAY4, RPLAY5, RPLAY6, and RPLAY7. As for the symbol of RPLY1, the 1st torso is the replay symbol, the 2nd torso is the watermelon symbol, and the 3rd torso is the 7 symbol / upper pie symbol / middle cherry symbol / bullet bra symbol (note that "/" is or When these symbols are displayed on the effective lines shown in FIGS. 46 (C) and 46 (D), RPLY1 is activated. If the replay 1 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, the RPLY1 is activated.

As for the symbols of RPLY2, the first cylinder is a watermelon symbol, the second cylinder is a bell symbol, and the third cylinder is a lower pie symbol, and when these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY2 operates. With Replay 1 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position), the main control means 1100 puts the lower pie symbol on the effective line (middle position). The reel stop control is executed so as to stop at the lower part of the display window).

Since the big pie pattern stops at the lower right of the third body, it can give a big impact to the player. By the subsequent stop operation, the watermelon symbol is always pulled into the first cylinder and the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop, and the RPLY2 is operated. That is, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is successful, the RPLY2 is activated by the subsequent stop operation. When the replay 1 is won and the stop switch 1044c is subjected to the first stop operation (first stop operation), the main control means 1100 transmits the stop operation frame position of the third cylinder to the sub control means 1200. For example, the stop operation frame position at the middle stage position of the third body transmits the symbol number 14 (bita position) or the symbol number 15 (one frame slip position) to the sub control means 1200. The sub-control means 1200 confirms in advance whether the current set value is an odd value or an even value, and when the set value is an odd value, up to one frame slip is allowed, while when the set value is an even value, it is allowed. , It is recognized that the number of pull-in frames is only allowed to slip by pressing 0 frames. In the sub-control means 1200, the current set value, the winning of the replay 1, the first stop operation is the third body, and whether or not the big pie symbol is stopped at the lower right of the third body depending on the stop operation frame position. When it is recognized and the stop operation is performed correctly, a loud sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" is generated from the speaker.

On the other hand, the sub-control means 1200 displays the number of shifted frames on the image display device 1034 when the stop operation is not performed correctly. For example, when the player's stop operation is operated one frame earlier than the permissible one frame, and the symbol number 16 is received, "the operation was performed one frame earlier" than the permissible one frame. The difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034, and a depressing sound effect such as "pushing" or "piro-piro-piro" is generated from the speaker. Similarly, when the symbol number 17 is received, the difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034 as "operation was performed two frames earlier" with respect to the allowable one frame, and a sound effect is generated from the speaker. On the contrary, when the player's stop operation is operated one frame later than the permissible 0 frame, and the symbol number 13 is received, "the operation was performed one frame later" with respect to the permissible 0 frame. The difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034, and a sound effect is generated. Similarly, when the symbol number 12 is received, the difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034 as "operation was performed two frames later" with respect to the allowable 0 frames, and a sound effect is generated.

The symbols of RPLY3 are the bell symbol / upper pie symbol for the 1st torso, the bell symbol for the 2nd torso, and the watermelon symbol for the 3rd torso. When these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY3 operates. do. If Replay 1 is won and the three turns are rotating and the technical intervention is unsuccessful due to the reverse push operation, the main control means 1100 will stop the watermelon symbol on the effective line of the reel. Execute stop control. The RPLY3 is operated by the subsequent stop operation. That is, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY3 is activated by the subsequent stop operation.

As for the symbols of RPLY4, the first cylinder is the upper pie symbol, the second cylinder is the bell symbol, and the third cylinder is the lower pie symbol, and when these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY4 operates. With Replay 1 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position), the main control means 1100 puts the lower pie symbol on the effective line (middle position). The reel stop control is executed so as to stop at the lower position of the display window). Since the big pie pattern stops at the lower right of the third body, it can give a big impact to the player. After that, by the stop operation of the stop switch 1044b, the bell symbol is surely pulled into the second body to stop, and even if the final operation of the stop switch 1044a aims at the big pie symbol, the main control means 1100 is moved up by the kicking control. Without stopping the pie symbol on the effective line, the watermelon symbol is always pulled into the first body to stop it, and the RPLY2 is operated. That is, the main control means 1100 executes the reel stop control so that the RPLY 4 does not operate even if the replay 1 is won. However, in the main control means 1100, regardless of whether or not the player's technical intervention is successful, the reverse push stop operation from the third body is on the effective line (position of the bita) or at the position of one frame slip. , Gives 1 point (1 point) of benefits related to the instruction function. In other words, when Replay 1 is won, 1 point (1 point) is given regardless of the result of the player's technical intervention. With this privilege (scores and points), the above-mentioned pseudo bonus (special game: ART or AT called the third bonus) winning lottery, additional lottery for the number of games or lottery for the number of acquisitions, games up to the number of ceiling games Since it is executed based on the benefits obtained by all the lottery that is advantageous to the player, such as subtraction of numbers, subtraction of hit points of the enemy, continuous lottery, etc., the result of the technical intervention of the player greatly affects the ball output. Become. If the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY3 is activated.

As for the symbols of RPLY5, the first cylinder is a replay symbol, the second cylinder is a bell symbol, and the third cylinder is a bardo check symbol, and when these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY5 operates. As for the symbols of RPLY6, the first cylinder is a replay symbol, the second cylinder is a bell symbol, and the third cylinder is a watermelon symbol, and when these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY6 operates. The symbols of RPLY7 are the 7 / bell symbol for the 1st torso, the bell symbol for the 2nd torso, and the bardo chef symbol for the 3rd torso. When these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY7 operates. do. Like RPLY4, RPLY5 to RPLY7 do not operate (win) these REPLAYs even if Replay 1 is won, but the replay required to distinguish the winning combination from other combinations and to make the stop control different. It is a role.

The replay 2 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAYs) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of the above-mentioned three types of REPLAYs, RPLY1, RPLY2, and RPLY6. When the replay 2 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 is activated. With Replay 2 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position), the main control means 1100 puts the lower pie symbol on the effective line (middle position). The reel stop control is executed so as to stop at the lower part of the display window). By the subsequent stop operation, the watermelon symbol is always pulled into the first cylinder and the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop, and the RPLY2 is operated. That is, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is successful, the RPLY2 is activated by the subsequent stop operation. The main control means 1100 provides a privilege related to the instruction function when the player's technical intervention is successful when the reverse push stop operation from the third body is on the effective line (bita position) or at the position of one frame slip. 1 point (1 point) will be given. In other words, only when Replay 1 is won and the player's technical intervention is successful, 1 point (1 point) is given. On the other hand, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY6 is activated by the subsequent stop operation, but the main control means 1100 does not give a privilege (0 points). The sub-control means 1200 generates a large sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" from the speaker when the stop operation is performed correctly, but when the stop operation is not performed correctly, the number of frames shifted to the image display device 1034 is displayed. Display and generate sound effects.

The replay 3 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAYs) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of four types of REPLAYs: RPLY1, RPLY2, RPLY3, and RPLY4. When the replay 3 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 is activated. With Replay 3 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position), the main control means 1100 puts the lower pie symbol on the effective line (middle position). The reel stop control is executed so as to stop at the lower part of the display window). When the subsequent second stop operation is the stop switch 1044b, the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop it. When the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the upper pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or the one-frame slip position (upper position) while aiming at the big pie symbol in the final third stop operation, the main control means. The 1100 executes the reel stop control so as to stop the upper pie symbol on the effective line (middle of the display window). If the player succeeds in two technical interventions, two points (2 points) will be given to the privilege related to the instruction function. In other words, if Replay 3 is won and the player's technical intervention is all successful, 2 points (2 points) will be given.

On the other hand, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY3 is activated by the subsequent stop operation, but the main control means 1100 gives 1 point (1 point) of the privilege related to the instruction function. .. Further, when the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is successful, and when the technical intervention is unsuccessful in the subsequent stop operation of the stop switch 1044a, the RPLY2 is activated, but the main control means 1100 gives an instruction. Give 1 point (1 point) of benefits related to the function. In other words, if Replay 3 is won and the player's technical intervention is unsuccessful, and if the player's technical intervention is successful once, 1 point (1 point) is given to both. .. The sub-control means 1200 generates a large sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" from the speaker when the stop operation is performed correctly, but when the stop operation is not performed correctly, the number of frames shifted to the image display device 1034 is displayed. Display and generate sound effects. When the replay 3 is won, the main control means 1100 performs stop control so that any of the four types of REPLAYs, RPLY1, RPLY2, RPLY3, and RPLY4, can be operated according to the operation order and timing of the stop operation.

The replay 4 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAYs) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of the above-mentioned five types of REPLAYs, RPLAY1, RPLAY2, RPLAY6, RPLAY4, and RPLAY5. When the replay 4 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 is activated. With Replay 4 winning and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position), the main control means 1100 puts the lower pie symbol on the effective line (middle position). The reel stop control is executed so as to stop at the lower part of the display window). When the subsequent second stop operation is the stop switch 1044b, the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop it. When the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the upper pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or the one-frame slip position (upper position), aiming at the big pie symbol in the final third stop operation, the main The control means 1100 executes the reel stop control so as to stop the upper pie symbol on the effective line (middle of the display window). If the player succeeds in two technical interventions, two points (2 points) will be given to the privilege related to the instruction function. In other words, if Replay 4 is won and the player's technical intervention is all successful, 2 points (2 points) will be given.

On the other hand, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY6 is activated by the subsequent stop operation, but the main control means 1100 does not give the privilege related to the instruction function (0 points). Further, when the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is successful, and when the technical intervention is unsuccessful in the subsequent stop operation of the stop switch 1044a, the RPLY2 is activated. Give 1 point (1 point) to the privilege related to the instruction function. In other words, if Replay 3 is won and the technical intervention of the stop switch 1044c by the player is unsuccessful, no privilege is given (0 points), but the technical intervention of the stop switch 1044c by the player is successful. If the technical intervention of the stop switch 1044a is unsuccessful, one point (1 point) is given as a privilege. The sub-control means 1200 generates a large sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" from the speaker when the stop operation is performed correctly, but when the stop operation is not performed correctly, the number of frames shifted to the image display device 1034 is displayed. Display and generate sound effects. When the replay 3 is won, the main control means 1100 performs stop control so that the four types of REPLAYs, RPLY1, RPLY2, RPLY4, and RPLY6, can be operated according to the operation order and timing of the stop operation, while the RPLAY5 It is a replay role that is not activated (winning), but is necessary to distinguish the winning combination from other roles and to make the stop control different.

The replay 5 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAYs) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of the above-mentioned four types of REPLAYs, RPLAY1, RPLAY2, RPLAY3, and RPLAY7. When the replay 5 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 is activated. With Replay 5 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position), the main control means 1100 stops the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower part of the display window). Executes reel stop control. By the subsequent stop operation, the watermelon symbol is always pulled into the first cylinder and the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop, and the RPLY2 is operated. That is, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is a successful bitter push, the RPLY2 is activated by the subsequent stop operation. However, in the main control means 1100, the reverse push stop operation from the third body is a position on the effective line (position of the bitter), and the instruction function is performed regardless of whether or not the technical intervention of the player is successful. 1 point (1 point) will be given. In other words, when Replay 1 is won, 1 point (1 point) is given regardless of the result of the player's technical intervention. With this privilege (scores and points), the above-mentioned pseudo bonus (special game: ART or AT called the third bonus) winning lottery, additional lottery for the number of games or lottery for the number of acquisitions, games up to the number of ceiling games Since it is executed based on the benefits obtained by all the lottery that is advantageous to the player, such as subtraction of numbers, subtraction of hit points of the enemy, continuous lottery, etc., the result of the technical intervention of the player greatly affects the ball output. Become. If the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY3 is activated. The sub-control means 1200 generates a large sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" from the speaker when the stop operation is performed correctly, but when the stop operation is not performed correctly, the number of frames shifted to the image display device 1034. Is displayed to generate a sound effect. The RPLY7 does not operate (win) even if the replay 5 is won, but is a replaying combination required to distinguish the winning combination from other combinations and to make the stop control different.

The replay 6 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAYs) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of the above-mentioned four types of REPLAYs, RPLAY1, RPLAY2, RPLAY6, and RPLAY7. When the replay 6 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 is activated. With Replay 6 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position), the main control means 1100 stops the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower part of the display window). Executes reel stop control. By the subsequent stop operation, the watermelon symbol is always pulled into the first cylinder and the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop, and the RPLY2 is operated. That is, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is a successful bitter push, the RPLY2 is activated by the subsequent stop operation. The main control means 1100 provides one privilege (1) regarding the instruction function when the player's technical intervention is successful at the position on the effective line (bita position) when the reverse push stop operation from the third body is performed. Point) Grant. In other words, only when the replay 6 is won and the player's technical intervention is successful, one point (1 point) is given. On the other hand, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY6 is activated by the subsequent stop operation, but the main control means 1100 does not give a privilege (0 points). The sub-control means 1200 generates a large sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" from the speaker when the stop operation is performed correctly, but when the stop operation is not performed correctly, the image display device 1034 is displaced from the bitter position. The number of frames is displayed and a sound effect indicating failure is generated.

The replay 7 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAY) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of four types of REPLAYs, RPLAY1, RPLY2, RPLAY3, RPLAY4, and RPLAY7. When the replay 7 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 is activated. With Replay 7 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position), the main control means 1100 stops the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower part of the display window). Executes reel stop control. When the subsequent second stop operation is the stop switch 1044b, the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop it. When the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the upper pie symbol is on the effective line (position of the bitter) while aiming at the big pie symbol in the final third stop operation, the main control means 1100 puts the upper pie symbol on the effective line. The reel stop control is executed so as to stop at (the middle stage of the display window), and the RPLY4 is operated. If the player succeeds in two technical interventions, two points (2 points) will be given to the privilege related to the instruction function. In other words, if Replay 3 is won and the player's technical intervention is all successful, 2 points (2 points) will be given.

On the other hand, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY3 is activated by the subsequent stop operation, but the main control means 1100 gives 1 point (1 point) of the privilege related to the instruction function. .. Further, when the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is successful, and when the technical intervention is unsuccessful in the subsequent stop operation of the stop switch 1044a, the RPLY2 is activated, but the main control means 1100 , Gives 1 point (1 point) of benefits related to the instruction function. In other words, if Replay 3 is won and the player's technical intervention is unsuccessful, and if the player's technical intervention is successful once, 1 point (1 point) is given to both. .. The sub-control means 1200 generates a large sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" from the speaker when the stop operation is performed correctly, but when the stop operation is not performed correctly, the number of frames shifted to the image display device 1034 is displayed. Display and generate sound effects. When the replay 3 is won, the main control means 1100 performs stop control so that any of the four types of REPLAYs, RPLY1, RPLY2, RPLY3, and RPLY4, can be operated according to the operation order and timing of the stop operation, while the RPLY7 performs stop control. It is a replay role that is not activated (winning), but is necessary to distinguish the winning combination from other roles and to make the stop control different.

The replay 8 is a combination in which a plurality of replay combinations (REPLAY) are simultaneously elected, and is composed of six types of REPLAYs: RPLAY1, RPLAY2, RPLAY6, RPLAY4, RPLAY5, and RPLAY7. When the replay 8 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 is activated. With Replay 8 won and the three reels rotating, push the big pie symbol (the symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) backward (stop operation from the third reel). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position), the main control means 1100 stops the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower part of the display window). Executes reel stop control. When the subsequent second stop operation is the stop switch 1044b, the bell symbol is always pulled into the second cylinder to stop it. When the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the upper pie symbol is on the effective line (position of the bitter) while aiming at the big pie symbol in the final third stop operation, the main control means 1100 puts the upper pie symbol on the effective line. The reel stop control is executed so as to stop at (the middle stage of the display window), and the RPLY4 is operated. If the player succeeds in two technical interventions, two points (2 points) will be given to the privilege related to the instruction function. In other words, if Replay 3 is won and all the player's technical interventions are successful twice, 2 points (2 points) will be given.

On the other hand, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the RPLY6 is activated by the subsequent stop operation, but the main control means 1100 does not give the privilege related to the instruction function (0 points). Further, when the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is successful, and when the technical intervention is unsuccessful in the subsequent stop operation of the stop switch 1044a, the RPLY2 is activated, but the main control means 1100 , Gives 1 point (1 point) of benefits related to the instruction function. In other words, if Replay 8 is won and the technical intervention of the stop switch 1044c by the player is unsuccessful, no privilege is given (0 points), but the technical intervention of the stop switch 1044c by the player is successful. If the technical intervention of the stop switch 1044a is unsuccessful, one point (1 point) is given as a privilege. The sub-control means 1200 generates a large sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" from the speaker when the stop operation is performed correctly, but when the stop operation is not performed correctly, the number of frames shifted to the image display device 1034 is displayed. Display and generate a sound effect that makes you feel uncomfortable. When the replay 3 is won, the main control means 1100 performs stop control so that any of the four types of REPLAYs, RPLY1, RPLY2, RPLY4, and RPLY6, can be operated according to the operation order and operation timing of the stop operation, while RPLY7. Is not activated (winning), but is a replay role required to distinguish the winning combination from other roles and to make the stop control different.

One small winning combination 1 is a combination in which a plurality of small winning combination (winning winning combination of one payout) is won at the same time, and there are four types of FRU7 (FRU means "fruit"), FRU10, FRU8, and FRU6. It consists of small roles. In the FRU7 symbol, the 1st torso is a replay symbol / seven symbol (note that "/" means or), the 2nd torso is a replay symbol / watermelon symbol, and the 3rd torso is a watermelon symbol. When these symbols are displayed on the valid lines shown in 46 (C) and 46 (D), the FRU7 wins and the payout becomes one (one medal is paid out or the credit is paid). 1 is added to the digital value). If one small winning combination 1 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, the FRU 7 wins.

The FRU10 symbol is the 1st torso is a bell symbol, the 2nd torso is a 7-Eleven symbol / Roquebra symbol / bullet bra symbol / Nakanoche symbol, and the 3rd torso is a lower pie symbol / Nakayuche symbol / watermelon symbol. , When these symbols are displayed on the effective lines shown in FIGS. 46 (C) and 46 (D), the FRU 10 wins a prize and the payout becomes one. One small winning combination 1 is won, and while the three reels are rotating, the big pie symbol (the symbol composed of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) is pushed backward (stop operation from the third reel). ), And when the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position), the main control means 1100 activates the lower pie symbol. The reel stop control is executed so as to stop on the line (lower part of the display window). In the subsequent stop operation, FRU10 wins a prize.

Since the big pie pattern stops at the lower right of the third body, it can give a big impact to the player. By the subsequent stop operation, one of the bell symbol on the 1st torso and the 7-Eleven / Roquebra symbol / bullet bra symbol / Nakamuche symbol is always pulled in and stopped, and the FRU10 wins and pays out. Becomes one. That is, if the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is successful, the FRU 10 wins the subsequent stop operation. In the main control means 1100, when one small winning combination 1 is won and the stop switch 1044c is subjected to the first stop operation (first stop operation), the position of the stop operation piece of the third cylinder is set as the sub control means. Send to 1200. For example, the stop operation frame position at the middle stage position of the third body transmits the symbol number 14 (bita position) or the symbol number 15 (one frame slip position) to the sub control means 1200. The sub-control means 1200 confirms in advance whether the current set value is an odd value or an even value, and when the set value is an odd value, up to one frame slip is allowed, while the set value is an even value. At the time of, it is recognized that the number of drawn frames is only allowed to slip by pressing 0 frames. In the sub-control means 1200, the current set value, the winning of one small winning combination 1, the first stop operation is the third cylinder, and the big pie symbol is stopped at the lower right of the third cylinder depending on the stop operation frame position. When it recognizes whether or not it has been done and the stop operation is performed correctly, a loud sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" is generated from the speaker.

On the other hand, the sub-control means 1200 displays the number of shifted frames on the image display device 1034 when the stop operation is not performed correctly. For example, when the player's stop operation is operated one frame earlier than the permissible one frame, and the symbol number 16 is received, "the operation was performed one frame earlier" than the permissible one frame. The difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034, and a depressing sound effect such as "pushing" or "piro-piro-piro" is generated from the speaker. Similarly, when the symbol number 17 is received, the difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034 as "operation was performed two frames earlier" with respect to the allowable one frame, and a sound effect is generated from the speaker. On the contrary, when the player's stop operation is operated one frame later than the permissible 0 frame, and the symbol number 13 is received, "the operation was performed one frame later" with respect to the permissible 0 frame. The difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034, and a sound effect is generated. Similarly, when the symbol number 12 is received, the difference in the number of frames is displayed on the image display device 1034 as "operation was performed two frames later" with respect to the allowable 0 frames, and a sound effect is generated.

As for the FRU8 symbol, the 1st torso is the upper pie symbol / watermelon symbol, the 2nd torso is the replay symbol, and the 3rd torso is the watermelon symbol. Therefore, the dividend will be one. When one small winning combination 1 is won and the three reels are rotating and the technical intervention is unsuccessful due to the reverse push operation, the main control means 1100 stops the watermelon symbol on the effective line. The reel stop control is executed in the same manner. The FRU8 is awarded by the subsequent stop operation. However, in the main control means 1100, regardless of whether or not the player's technical intervention is successful, the reverse push stop operation from the third body is on the effective line (position of the bita) or at the position of one frame slip. , Gives 1 point (1 point) of benefits related to the instruction function. In other words, if one small win is won, one point (1 point) will be given regardless of the result of the player's technical intervention. With this privilege (scores and points), the above-mentioned pseudo bonus (special game: ART or AT called the third bonus) winning lottery, additional lottery for the number of games or lottery for the number of acquisitions, games up to the number of ceiling games Since it is executed based on the benefits obtained by all the lottery that is advantageous to the player, such as subtraction of numbers, subtraction of hit points of the enemy, continuous lottery, etc., the result of the technical intervention of the player greatly affects the ball output. Become. If the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044c and the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the FRU8 will win in the subsequent stop operation. The FRU6 symbol has a bell symbol / bardo che symbol for the 1st torso, a replay symbol for the 2nd torso, and a watermelon symbol / replay symbol for the 3rd torso. FRU6 wins a prize and the payout becomes one. However, FRU6 does not win even if one small winning combination 1 is won, but it is a small winning combination necessary to distinguish the winning combination from other combinations and to make the stop control different.

The one-card small winning combination 2 is a winning combination in which a plurality of small winning combination (one-card payout winning combination) is won at the same time, and is composed of four types of small winning combination: FRU7, FRU10, FRU6, and FRU19. In the FRU19 symbol, the 1st torso is a replay symbol / bullet bra symbol / lower pie symbol, the 2nd torso is a 7 symbol, and the 3rd torso is a 7 symbol, and when these symbols are displayed on the effective line, FRU19 wins a prize and the payout becomes one. If one small winning combination 2 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, the FRU 7 wins. One small winning combination 1 is won, and while the three reels are rotating, the big pie symbol (the symbol composed of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) is pushed backward (stop operation from the third reel). ), And when the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position), the main control means 1100 activates the lower pie symbol. The reel stop control is executed so as to stop on the line (lower part of the display window). In the subsequent stop operation, FRU10 wins a prize. In the sub-control means 1200, the current set value, the winning of one small winning combination 2, the first stop operation is the third cylinder, and the big pie symbol is stopped at the lower right of the third cylinder depending on the stop operation frame position. When it recognizes whether or not it has been done and the stop operation is performed correctly, a loud sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" is generated from the speaker.

On the other hand, when one small winning combination 2 is won and the three reels are rotating and the technical intervention is unsuccessful due to the reverse push operation, the main control means 1100 makes the watermelon symbol / replay symbol effective. The reel stop control is executed so as to stop on the line. The FRU6 is won by the subsequent stop operation. If the stop operation is not performed correctly, the sub control means 1200 displays the number of shifted frames on the image display device 1034 in the same manner as described above. The FRU19 does not win a prize even if one small winning combination 2 is won, but it is a small winning combination necessary to distinguish the winning combination from other combinations and to make the stop control different.

The main control means 1100 is a privilege related to the instruction function when the player's technical intervention is successful when the reverse push stop operation from the third body is on the effective line (position of the bita) or at the position of one frame slip. 1 point (1 point) is given, but if the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the privilege related to the instruction function is not given (0 point: 0 point).

The one-card small winning combination 3 is a winning combination in which a plurality of small winning combination (one-card payout winning combination) is won at the same time, and is composed of five types of small winning combination: FRU7, FRU10, FRU8, FRU6, and FRU20. As for the FRU20 symbol, the 1st torso is the replay symbol / bullet bra symbol / lower pie symbol, the 2nd torso is the 7 symbol, and the 3rd torso is the upper pie symbol, and these symbols are displayed on the effective line. Then, FRU20 wins a prize and the payout becomes one. If one small winning combination 3 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, the FRU 7 wins. One small winning combination 3 is won, and with the three reels rotating, the big pie symbol (the symbol composed of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) is pushed backward (stop operation from the third reel). ), And when the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position), the main control means 1100 stops the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower part of the display window). The reel stop control is executed so as to be performed. In the subsequent stop operation, FRU10 wins a prize. In the sub-control means 1200, the current set value, the winning of one small winning combination 3, the first stop operation is the third cylinder, and the big pie symbol is stopped at the lower right of the third cylinder depending on the stop operation frame position. When it is recognized whether or not it has been done and the stop operation is performed correctly, a loud sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" is generated from the speaker.

On the other hand, when one small winning combination 3 is won and the three reels are rotating and the technical intervention is unsuccessful due to the reverse push operation, the main control means 1100 puts the watermelon symbol on the effective line. The reel stop control is executed so as to stop. The FRU8 is awarded by the subsequent stop operation. If the stop operation is not performed correctly, the sub control means 1200 displays the number of shifted frames on the image display device 1034 in the same manner as described above. It should be noted that FRU6 and FRU20 do not win even if one small winning combination 3 is won, but they are small winning combination necessary for distinguishing the winning combination from other combinations and making the stop control different. The main control means 1100 provides a privilege related to the instruction function regardless of whether or not the player's technical intervention is successful at the position where the reverse push stop operation from the third body is on the effective line (position of the bita). 1 point (1 point) will be given.

The one-card small winning combination 4 is a winning combination in which a plurality of small winning combination (one-card payout winning combination) is won at the same time, and is composed of four types of small winning combination: FRU7, FRU10, FRU6, and FRU21. The FRU21 symbol is the 1st torso replay symbol / bullet bra symbol / lower pie symbol, the 2nd torso is the 7 symbol, and the 3rd torso is the bullet bra symbol, and these symbols are displayed on the effective line. Then, FRU21 wins a prize and the payout becomes one. If one small winning combination 4 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, the FRU 7 wins. One small winning combination 4 is won, and while the three reels are rotating, the big pie symbol (the symbol composed of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) is pushed backward (stop operation from the third reel). ), And when the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position), the main control means 1100 stops the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower part of the display window). The reel stop control is executed so as to be performed. In the subsequent stop operation, FRU10 wins a prize. In the sub-control means 1200, the current set value, the winning of one small winning combination 4, the first stop operation is the third cylinder, and the big pie symbol is stopped at the lower right of the third cylinder depending on the stop operation frame position. When it is recognized whether or not it has been done and the stop operation is performed correctly, a loud sound effect such as "van" or "dokhan" is generated from the speaker.

On the other hand, when one small winning combination 4 is won and the three reels are rotating and the technical intervention is unsuccessful due to the reverse push operation, the main control means 1100 makes the watermelon symbol / replay symbol effective. The reel stop control is executed so as to stop on the line. The FRU6 is won by the subsequent stop operation. If the stop operation is not performed correctly, the sub control means 1200 displays the number of shifted frames on the image display device 1034 in the same manner as described above. The FRU 21 does not win a prize even if one small winning combination 4 is won, but it is a small winning combination necessary to distinguish the winning combination from other combinations and to make the stop control different. The main control means 1100 has one privilege related to the instruction function when the player's technical intervention is successful at the position on the effective line (bita position) when the reverse push stop operation from the third body is performed (the position of the bita). 1 point) On the other hand, if the technical intervention is unsuccessful, the privilege related to the instruction function is not given (0 points: 0 points).

That is, one set value (settings 1 to 6) for determining the lottery data (one from a plurality of lottery tables) to be used when performing the lottery process of the winning combination is selected from the plurality of setting values. In the gaming machine set up in the game, a plurality of reels (three reels) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface, and a winning combination lottery means for determining the winning or not of the winning combination by drawing a winning combination for each game. (Lottery of roles by the main control unit) and when multiple reels are rotated for each game and the operation of the stop switch provided corresponding to each reel is accepted, the corresponding reels are selected. The symbol display control means (reel rotation control by the main control unit, reel stop control by operating the stop switch according to the winning result), which are individually stopped and display the symbol in the mode according to the determined combination, It is equipped. Among the combinations determined by the combination lottery means, there is a combination for pressing, and the combination for pressing can be won when the set value is an odd number, and won when the set value is an even number. There are an impossible odd-numbered pusher and an even-numbered pusher that can be won when the set value is an even number and cannot be won when the set value is an odd number. When is an odd value, the odd-numbered eye-pressing combination is determined, while when the even-numbered eye-pressing combination cannot be won and the set value is an even-numbered value, the even-numbered eye is determined. While deciding whether or not to win the push combination, the odd-numbered pusher cannot be won, and the symbol display control means wins the odd-numbered pusher and the even-numbered pusher. By making the stop control for at least one rotating cylinder different from the bitter push or the pull-in of one frame, the pull-in range of the push symbol is changed (changes between 0 frame and 1 frame).

Application Example 3 (Modified Example in which the following functions are added to the above Example):
The third embodiment in which the following functions are added to the first or second embodiment will be described in detail, but the third embodiment alone is novel and has an inventive step.

FIG. 51 is a configuration diagram of a transition replay combination. FIG. 52 is a main part of the game state transition diagram (RT state), and some RT states are omitted.

As described above, FIG. 51 (A) shows a replay combination for eye-pressing (eye-pressing re-game combination) that serves as a transition replay combination, and replays 1 to 4 are won with an odd number of set values (placement). On the other hand, the set value is an even number and the player does not win (there is no odd number. See FIG. 51 (B)). On the contrary, in Replay 5 to Replay 8, the set value is an even number and the winning is performed (there is a number), while the set value is an odd number and the winning is not performed (there is no number. See FIG. 51 (B)). Replays 1 to 4 and replays 5 to 8 in which a plurality of replay combinations are simultaneously won are transition replay combinations, and RPLY2 included in these replay combinations is a transition replay. As for the symbols of RPLY2, the first cylinder is a watermelon symbol, the second cylinder is a bell symbol, and the third cylinder is a lower pie symbol, and when these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY2 operates. Replays 1 to 8 are drawn in the RT1 state shown in FIG. 52, but replays 1 to 4 can be won with an odd number of setting values, and replays 5 to 8 can be won with an even number of setting values. ..

The symbols of RPLY2 are the watermelon symbol for the 1st torso, the bell symbol for the 2nd torso, and the lower pie symbol for the 3rd torso. When these symbols are displayed on the effective line, RPLY2 operates. , The RT1 state shifts to the RT-like 4 state (see FIG. 52).

When any of Replay 1 to Replay 4 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 always operates, while the three reels are rotating, and the big pie symbol ( Aim the upper pie symbol (the symbol composed of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) by pushing back (the third stop operation from the body), and the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position). When the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing at), the main control means 1100 executes the reel stop control so as to stop the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower stage of the display window). When the stop switch 1044c is operated for the first time other than this timing, the main control means 1100 executes the reel stop control so as to stop the watermelon symbol on the effective line, and the RPLY3 or RPLY6 is operated.

When any of Replay 5 to Replay 8 is won and the first stop operation is the stop switch 1044a or the stop switch 1044b, RPLY1 always operates, while the three reels are rotating, and the big pie symbol ( Aim at the upper pie symbol (the symbol composed of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) by pushing back (the third stop operation from the body), and the stop switch 1044c is operated at the timing when the lower pie symbol is on the effective line (bita position). If so, the main control means 1100 executes the reel stop control so as to stop the lower pie symbol on the effective line (lower stage of the display window). When the stop switch 1044c is operated for the first time other than this timing, the main control means 1100 executes the reel stop control so as to stop the watermelon symbol on the effective line, and the RPLY3 or RPLY6 is operated. Since the other operations of Replay 1 to Replay 4 and Replay 5 to Replay 8 have already been described, they will be used.

RT0 in FIG. 52 is an initial state (non-RT state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination (replay combination) does not fluctuate, and from the game immediately after the stage setting value is reset, the initial state (“initial replay”). It is also called "state") and the normal game (general game) can be started. The winning probability (replay probability) of replay in a general game is about 1 / 7.3. When BB1 (Type 1 accessory continuous operation device: Big bonus 1 of actual bonus) is internally won in a normal game and is in a carry-over state, the replay probability is about 1/3 of the internal winning of BB1. By displaying the operation symbols of BB1 (Seven, Seven, Seven), the bonus game of BB1 can be started, and the bonus game of BB1 ends by paying out more than the specified number of 359 cards (360 cards or more) in the BB1 game. ..

When this BB1 bonus game ends (from the next game that ends), the RT1 state is set, and 25 games (predetermined number of times) of high-probability games can be executed. It returns to the state and the normal game can be started. In this RT1 state, replays 1 to replay 4 and replays 5 to replays including at least a non-variable replay combination (also referred to as a "normal replay combination") and a transition replay combination (RPLY2) that do not change the RT state as a replay combination. 8 is drawn according to the set value (odd or even).

The symbol of RPLY2 is a specific transition symbol (the 1st torso is a watermelon symbol, the 2nd torso is a bell symbol, and the 3rd torso is a lower pie symbol), and when it is displayed on the effective line, RPLY2 wins ( Operation). When a specific transition symbol is displayed in the RT1 state, the main control means 1100 fluctuates the probability that the re-game combination will be won, and sets the RT4 state as the RT game (high probability game) of 50 games (predetermined number of times). ) Is executable. On the other hand, the main control means 1100 maintains the RT1 state without changing the probability that the replay combination will be won even if the normal replay symbol or another replay symbol (RPLY3, RPLY4, etc.) is displayed. For example, when a specific transition symbol is displayed in the 20th game in the RT1 state, the next game is in the RT4 state, and 50 new RT games can be performed. In this case, as a result, it becomes possible to perform a high-probability game of 70 games, but the RT4 state ends when the actual bonus is won in the RT game in the middle. Similarly, if the actual bonus is won in the RT1 game in the middle, the RT1 state ends.

That is, the most advantageous for the player is to keep the high-probability game with almost no loss (unwinning) for as long as possible, and to win the actual bonus during the high-probability game without reducing medals and credits. For example, if a specific transition symbol is displayed in the 25th game (final game) in the RT1 state and a new high-probability game of 50 games can be executed, a total of 75 high-probability games can be played. , The winning of the actual bonus and the bonus game are repeated endlessly during these 75 games.

As for the points, in the RT1 state where the set value is an odd number, replays 1 to 4 are won (there is a number), but when the set value is an even number, the points are not won. Further, in the RT1 state where the set value is an even number, the replays 5 to 8 are won (there is a number), but when the set value is an odd number, the player is not won. As a result, there is a difference in the difficulty of pressing, and the number of balls to be ejected differs greatly depending on whether the set value is odd or even. That is, if the set value is an odd number, up to one frame slip is allowed, so that a specific transition symbol can be easily displayed in the RT1 state, and the transition to RT4 is possible. On the other hand, if the set value is an even number, only bitter pressing (zero-frame slip) is allowed, so it is difficult for a specific transition symbol to be displayed in the RT1 state, and it is not easy for beginners to shift to RT4. Furthermore, the player looks at the degree of slippage of one set of symbols for pressing (pressing symbols), and the set value is an odd number for one-frame sliding, and the set value for bita pressing (0-frame sliding). You can know that it is an even number.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the types of symbols.

From the top, the upper pie symbol, the lower pie symbol, the seven symbol, the Nakayu Che symbol, the Nakamu Che symbol, the watermelon symbol, the bell symbol, the replay symbol, the location bra symbol, and the bullet bra symbol. For example, the upper pie symbol is arranged on the left reel, 0 on the middle reel, and 1 on the right reel, and the watermelon symbol is arranged on the left reel, 4 on the middle reel, and 4 on the right reel. (Since other symbols have the same number, the explanation is omitted). The types of symbols for each reel are 9 types for the left reel, 8 types for the middle reel, and 9 types for the right reel.

54 to 57 are schematic views showing the symbol display state of the window portion 3 for displaying the symbols of the three reels 2 in chronological order. The effective line is the above-mentioned irregular line (the left reel is the middle row-the middle reel is the upper row-the right reel is the lower row).

In the main control means 1100, replay 1 to replay 4 or replay 5 to replay 8 are internally elected in the above-mentioned RT1 state, and the main control means 1100 is specified by a reverse push operation of the stop switch (specific operation or first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c). The transition symbol is controlled so that it can be displayed on the effective line, and the RPLY2 is awarded by displaying the operation symbol. The main control means 1100 limits the replay combination to be won according to the set value (replay 1 to replay 4 can be won when the set value is odd, or replay 5 to replay 8 can be won when the set value is even). By changing the stop control according to the replaying combination, the pull-in range of one symbol (big pie symbol) is made different between the two frames, which are the symbols for pressing (pressing symbols). In other words, the main control means 1100 has at least one round cylinder (right turn) depending on whether the small winning combination for odd-numbered set values is won or the small winning combination for even-numbered set values is won. Stop control is performed to make the pull-in range of the eye-pressing symbol (the big pie symbol consisting of the upper pie symbol and the lower pie symbol) different for only the torso or (two torso of right-handed torso and left-handed torso) (however). All three cylinders are acceptable).

In FIG. 54 (A), when the set value is odd, replay 1 is internally won, and all reel drums are rotating, the lower pie symbol of reel 1030R (right-handed cylinder) number 16 is 1 from the effective line. It shows the state of being located on the frame (the state of being in the position of sliding one frame). At this timing, when the stop switch 1044c is operated by the first stop operation (first operation), the main control means 1100 slides the reel 1030R one frame by the pull-in control to stop the lower pie symbol on the effective line. (See FIG. 54 (B)). As a matter of course, when the stop switch 1044c is operated at a timing slightly higher than shown in FIG. Therefore, the reel 1030R is stopped instantly.

FIG. 54C shows that the stop switch 1044b was operated by the second stop operation to stop one of the bell symbols (the bell symbol of number 8 in the figure) on the effective line. FIG. 54 (D) shows that the stop switch 1044a was operated by the third stop operation (last operation) to stop one of the watermelon symbols on the effective line, and the RPLY2 won a prize (operation). When a specific transition symbol is displayed in the RT1 state, the main control means 1100 fluctuates the probability that the re-game combination will be won, and sets the RT4 state as the RT game of 50 games (predetermined number of times) from the next game. Make (high probability game) feasible. When the replay 1 is won, the main control means 1100 performs stop control so that only RPLY1, RPLY2, and RPLY3 are operated. Therefore, even if the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the pie symbol is on the effective line, the stop switch 1044a is operated. By kicking control, the watermelon symbol of number 9 is stopped on the effective line, and RPLY2 is won. Therefore, if the first stop operation of the reel 1030R is successful and the lower pie symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the subsequent second stop operation and the third stop operation may be performed appropriately. On the other hand, if the first stop operation of the reel 1030R is unsuccessful, the main control means 1100 stops one of the watermelon symbols on the effective line, and the RPLY6 wins in the subsequent stop operation, so that the replay combination is won. The probability of doing this does not fluctuate and maintains the RT1 state. If the failure continues as it is, the RT1 state will end after 25 games have been digested, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In FIG. 55 (A), when the set value is odd, the replay 3 is internally won, and all the reel drums are rotating, the lower pie symbol of the reel 1030R (right-handed cylinder) number 16 is 1 from the effective line. It shows the state of being located on the frame (the state of being in the position of sliding one frame). At this timing, when the stop switch 1044c is operated by the first stop operation (first operation), the main control means 1100 slides the reel 1030R one frame by the pull-in control to stop the lower pie symbol on the effective line. (See FIG. 55 (B)). As a matter of course, when the stop switch 1044c is operated at a timing slightly higher than shown in FIG. Therefore, the reel 1030R is stopped instantly.

FIG. 55 (C) shows that the stop switch 1044b was operated by the second stop operation to stop one of the bell symbols (the bell symbol of number 8 in the figure) on the effective line. In FIG. 55 (D), the stop switch 1044a is shown at the timing when the upper pie symbol of No. 12 is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position) by the third stop operation (last operation). Is operated, the main control means 1100 stops the upper pie symbol on the effective line (middle of the display window), indicating that the RPLY4 has won (operated). Since the symbol of RPLY4 is not a specific transition symbol, the main control means 1100 maintains the RT1 state without changing the probability that the replay combination will be won. On the other hand, by the third stop operation (last operation), the stop switch 1044a is operated except at the timing when the upper pie symbol of No. 12 is on the effective line (bita position) or one frame slip position (middle position). Then, one of the watermelon symbols is stopped on the effective line, and RPLY2 wins (operates). For example, when the stop switch 1044a is operated at the position of the two-frame slip shown in FIG. 54 (D), the watermelon symbol of No. 14 is stopped (immediately stopped) on the effective line, and RPLY2 wins (operates). By varying the probability that the re-game combination will be won, the RT4 state is set, and 50 games (predetermined number of times) of RT games (high-probability games) can be executed from the next game. That is, the player is required to remove the replay of the stop switch 1044a so that the RPLY4 does not win a prize.

In FIG. 56 (A), when the set value is an even number, the replay 5 is internally won, and all the reel drums are rotating, the lower pie symbol of the reel 1030R (right-handed cylinder) number 16 is on the effective line. The state of being positioned (the state of being in the position of 0-frame slip) is shown. At this timing, when the stop switch 1044c is operated by the first stop operation (first operation), the main control means 1100 stops the reel 1030R by the pull-in control and stops the lower pie symbol on the effective line. (See FIG. 56 (B)).

FIG. 56C shows that the stop switch 1044b was operated by the second stop operation to stop one of the bell symbols (the bell symbol of number 8 in the figure) on the effective line. FIG. 56 (D) shows that the stop switch 1044a was operated by the third stop operation (last operation) to stop one of the watermelon symbols on the effective line, and the RPLY2 won a prize (operation). When a specific transition symbol is displayed in the RT1 state, the main control means 1100 fluctuates the probability that the re-game combination will be won, and sets the RT4 state as the RT game of 50 games (predetermined number of times) from the next game. Make (high probability game) feasible. When the replay 1 is won, the main control means 1100 performs stop control so that only RPLY1, RPLY2, and RPLY3 are operated. Therefore, even if the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the pie symbol is on the effective line, the stop switch 1044a is operated. By kicking control, the watermelon symbol of number 9 is stopped on the effective line, and RPLY2 is won. Therefore, if the first stop operation of the reel 1030R is successful and the lower pie symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the subsequent second stop operation and the third stop operation may be performed appropriately. On the other hand, if the first stop operation of the reel 1030R is unsuccessful, the main control means 1100 stops one of the watermelon symbols on the effective line, and the RPLY6 wins in the subsequent stop operation, so that the replay combination is won. The probability of doing this does not fluctuate and maintains the RT1 state. If the failure continues as it is, the RT1 state will end after 25 games have been digested, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In FIG. 57 (A), when the set value is an even number, the replay 7 is internally won, and all the reel drums are rotating, the lower pie symbol of the reel 1030R (right-handed cylinder) number 16 is on the effective line. The state of being positioned (the state of being in the position of 0-frame slip) is shown. At this timing, when the stop switch 1044c is operated by the first stop operation (first operation), the main control means 1100 instantly stops the reel 1030R (slides 0 frames) by the pull-in control, and the lower pie symbol. Is stopped on the effective line (see FIG. 57 (B)).

FIG. 57C shows that the stop switch 1044b was operated by the second stop operation to stop one of the bell symbols (the bell symbol of number 8 in the figure) on the effective line. In FIG. 57 (D), the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the upper pie symbol of the number 12 is on the effective line (position of the bitter) by the third stop operation (last operation), and the main control means 1100 is operated. The upper pie symbol is stopped on the effective line (middle of the display window), indicating that RPLY4 has won (operated). Since the symbol of RPLY4 is not a specific transition symbol, the main control means 1100 maintains the RT1 state without changing the probability that the replay combination will be won. On the other hand, when the stop switch 1044a is operated at a timing other than the timing when the upper pie symbol of No. 12 is on the effective line (position of the bitter) by the third stop operation (last operation), one of the watermelon symbols is activated. Stopping up, RPLY2 wins (operates). For example, when the stop switch 1044a is operated at the position of the two-frame slip shown in FIG. 54 (D), the watermelon symbol of No. 14 is stopped (immediately stopped) on the effective line, and RPLY2 wins (operates). By varying the probability that the re-game combination will be won, the RT4 state is set, and 50 games (predetermined number of times) of RT games (high-probability games) can be executed from the next game. Further, when the stop switch 1044a is operated at a position one frame below the two-frame sliding position shown in FIG. 54 (D), the watermelon symbol of No. 9 is stopped on the effective line by sliding four frames, and RPLY2 Wins (operates). That is, the player is required to remove the replay of the stop switch 1044a so that the RPLY4 does not win a prize other than the position of the bitter.

Reverse Example: In the above, the symbol of RPLY2 has been described as a specific transition symbol (the first torso is a watermelon symbol, the second torso is a bell symbol, and the third torso is a lower pie symbol). "Hanabi" (Across) has already appeared as a popular model of pachislot RT machines. After the bonus game, it is possible to shift to two types: a fireworks challenge in the RT1 state (high probability replay state) and a fireworks game (high probability replay state) in which the fireworks game rush replay operation shifts to the RT4 state during the fireworks challenge. The maximum fireworks challenge is 20G, and it ends with the fireworks game rush replay operation, 20G digestion or bonus establishment. The fireworks game rush replay probability is about 1 / 3.8 in practice, and it is a game that aims to rush into the fireworks game while digesting the fireworks challenge as much as possible. The number of RT digestion games is displayed at the bottom of the reel, and it is recommended to win the fireworks game rush replay by pushing forward from the remaining 7G. That is, if the fireworks game rush replay is won before the remaining 7G, the replay loss is required by pressing the button by the reverse push operation. Specifically, when it is notified that the fireworks game rush replay has been internally won, after hitting the middle and right reels appropriately, the stop switch 1044a is operated aiming at the noren symbol of the black bar symbol on the left reel frame or the upper row. Then, the replay has succeeded, and the fireworks challenge in which the RT1 state (high probability replay state) is maintained continues. On the other hand, if the replay Hazushi is unsuccessful and the fireworks game rush replay is activated, the fireworks game will continue for 20 games after the next game. When the fireworks game ends, the game shifts to the RT0 state of the initial state (non-RT state) in which the winning probability of the replay role (replay role) does not change.

A case where the present invention is applied to the specifications of the pachislot RT machine "Hanabi" will be described. In the RT1 state where the set value is odd, Replay 1 to Replay 4 are won (there is a number), but when the set value is even, they are not won. Further, in the RT1 state where the set value is an even number, the replays 5 to 8 are won (there is a number), but when the set value is an odd number, the replay 5 is not won. The rush replay is replay 1 to replay 4 or replay 5 to replay 8, and if the rush replay is won during 20 games in the RT1 state, it is notified that the reverse push operation should be performed. If the player is not a reverse push operation, the replay loss is unsuccessful and RPLY1 always wins (operates). When a specific transition symbol is displayed in the RT1 state, the main control means 1100 shifts to the RT4 state by varying the probability that the re-game combination will be won, and the RT game (high) of 20 games (predetermined number of times). Probabilistic game) is made feasible. For example, if a specific transition symbol is displayed in the first game of the RT1 state, the game shifts to the RT4 state of 20 games, but the high-probability replay state of the RT1 state and the RT4 state has only 21 games in total. , It will be very disadvantageous for the player.

On the other hand, if the rush replay is won during the 20 games in the RT1 state (recommended is the remaining 7 games or more), it is notified that the reverse push operation should be performed. When performing replay loss, the player operates the stop switch 1044a aiming at one symbol (big pie symbol) in two frames. If the set value is an odd number, the main control means 1100 allows up to one frame slip and pulls in the big pie symbol to stop it. On the other hand, if the set value is an even number, the big pie symbol is pushed (0 frame slip). To pull in and stop. However, the replay loss is unsuccessful at other operation timings, and the main control means 1100 stops the watermelon symbol on the effective line. If the replay loss is unsuccessful, the main control means 1100 determines the probability that the replay combination will be won when either RPLY3 or RPLY6 is activated by the subsequent stop operation and a specific transition symbol is displayed in the RT1 state. It is fluctuated to shift to the RT4 state, and 20 games (predetermined number of times) of RT games (high-probability games) can be executed. That is, RPLY1, RPLY3, or RPLY6 are all specific transition symbols, and when they are displayed on the valid line, these RPLYs win (operate), and the main control means 1100 shifts to the RT4 state.

In other words, one set value for determining the lottery data (generally, "lottery tables 1 to 6") used when performing the lottery of the winning combination is a plurality of set values (1 to 6). ) Is selected and determined by changing the setting. This spinning machine has a plurality of spinning drums (3 reels) in which a plurality of types of symbols (20 to 21 in a maximum of 10 types) are arranged on the outer peripheral surface, and a set value determined in the game. Using the corresponding lottery data (lottery table), a combination lottery means (main control means 1100) for drawing a combination and a plurality of reels are rotated in a game and provided corresponding to each reel. It is provided with a control means (main control means 1100) that receives an operation of a stop switch, individually stops the corresponding reels within a predetermined movement range, and displays a symbol according to the lottery result of the winning combination. .. Among the combinations determined by the combination lottery means (main control means 1100) in the combination lottery, there are transition replay combinations (replay 1 to replay 8) that require a push operation of three stop switches. The transition re-game combination includes an odd-numbered transition re-game combination (replay 1 to replay 4) that can be won when the set value is an odd number, and an even-numbered combination that can be won when the set value is an even number. There is a transition replay role (replay 5 to replay 8). The games include a normal game in which the re-game combination is won with a predetermined probability (generally 1 / 7.3) and a high-probability game in which the re-game combination is won with a higher probability than the predetermined probability (generally, the replay probability is 1). There is / 2). The control means is triggered by the combination lottery means (main control means 1100) determining the winning of the bonus combination (feature continuous operation device) and the bonus game started by displaying the operation symbol of the bonus combination. (Main control means 1100) enables a predetermined number of high-probability games (RT1 games) to be executed.

In the high-probability game, the control means (main control means 1100) changes the probability that the re-game combination is won when one of the transition re-game combinations is won and a specific transition symbol is displayed. , Enables a predetermined number of games (RT4 games) to be executed. In a high-probability game, when the control means (main control means 1100) executes a control to display a specific transition symbol, the eyes are applied to at least one drum (right drum, or right drum and left drum). Stop control is performed so that the pull-in range of the push symbol is different between the odd-numbered transition re-game combination and the even-numbered transition re-game combination. Specifically, in the odd-numbered transition re-game combination, the symbol pull-in range is shifted by one frame, and in the even-numbered transition re-game combination, the symbol pull-in range is different by zero-frame slip. Then, (1) a gaming machine capable of displaying a specific transition symbol when the push symbol (big pie symbol) is pulled in and stopped by the push operation of the stop switch, and vice versa, (2) stop. There are some gaming machines in which a specific transition symbol is not displayed (cannot be displayed) when the push symbol (big pie symbol) is pulled in and stopped by the push operation of the switch.

Application Example 4 (Modification Example 4):
FIG. 58 is a design layout of the drum and the like. The difference from FIG. 46 is a combination display determination diagram of the symbols shown in FIGS. 58 (C) and 58 (D). When all three reels of the drum portion 2 are stopped, the main control means 1100 is on the effective line of the window portion 3 according to the number of inserted game medals (in this case, the number of inserted is always three, and the middle stage is horizontally straight. (Line only) is used to determine the combination display of the symbols related to winning and operation. That is, in all games, three cards are always inserted, and the effective line is the first middle stage (the left drum 2a is the middle stage, the middle drum 2b is the middle stage, and the right drum 2c is the middle stage). Since the other matters are the same, the explanations after FIG. 46 are used.

FIG. 59 is a concept of a lottery table. The only difference from FIG. 48 is that the winning area of the small bell for pushing the button + RB has increased, and the other matters are the same, so the explanations after FIG. 48 are used. In addition to the replaying combination for pressing (the replaying combination for pressing) in FIG. 48, the pressing order replaying combination for pressing (common to the set values 1 to 6) is drawn regardless of the set value (common to the set values 1 to 6). Since there is a push-order replaying combination for pushing the eyes, the explanations from FIG. 48 onward are used (not shown).

As an example in which either FRU30 or FRU31 always wins a prize, the push bell small winning combination is a small winning combination in which at least FRU30 and FRU31 win at the same time. Furthermore, one small winning combination for stop control is won.

FRU30 is usually a bell, and the combination of symbols is that the left drum is a bell symbol, the middle drum is a bell symbol and the right drum is a bell symbol, and when a prize is won, the bell symbol is displayed on the center horizontal line and there are 9 payouts. .. FRU31 is a strong bell, and the combination of symbols is that the left drum is a watermelon symbol, the middle drum is a bardo chef symbol, and the right drum is a bardo chef symbol or a lower pie symbol. It is displayed and there are 9 payouts. While the normal bell is usually a small role, the strong bell is treated as a rare small role, so it is easy to shift to pseudo bonuses and special games. That is, when the small winning bell is won, it is more advantageous to display the strong bell than to display the normal bell, and the assist function activation lottery and additional lottery are performed, and pseudo bonuses and specials are performed. As the number of games to be played and the number of continuous games increases, the ball ejection performance (the ejection rate) increases.

There are three types of small bells for pushing the eyes, a small bell for pushing the left eye, a small bell for pushing the middle eye, and a small bell for pushing the right eye. For example, in the left-handed bell small winning combination, FRU30 and FRU31 and one small winning combination A are elected at the same time (however, only FRU30 and FRU31 may be elected). FRU30 and FRU31 and one small winning combination B for pushing order control are simultaneously elected as the bell small winning combination for middle-sized pushing. FRU30 and FRU31 and one small winning combination C for pushing order control are simultaneously elected as the right-eye pushing bell small winning combination.

When the left-eye pushing bell small winning combination is won, the main control means 1100 transmits the winning combination information indicating that the left-eye pushing bell small winning combination has been won to the sub-control means 1200. Upon receiving the winning combination information, the sub-control means 1200 generates a "chance" and a voice from the speaker 1036, and displays the "chance time" on the image display device 1034. Further, the sub control means 1200 turns on the chance LED (not shown). Here, the sub-control means 1200 displays a quiz for deriving the correct answer pressing order on the image display device 1034. Specifically, as a quiz, "The height of the main character A" is displayed on the image display device 1034, three frames are displayed on the screen above the reel, "165 cm" is displayed on the left frame of the screen, and the inside of the screen. The characters "164 cm" are displayed in the frame and "166 cm" is displayed in the right frame of the screen. Player X, who is familiar with the main character A, knows that the correct answer is 165 cm, so he operates the left stop button without hesitation. It may be stopped at, but even if you do not know it, the answer is correct with a probability of 1/3, so operate the stop button appropriately or press the bita aiming at the DDT point.

60 to 63 are schematic views showing the symbol display state of the window portion 3 for displaying the symbols of the three reels 2 in chronological order. The effective line is the above-mentioned center horizontal line (the left reel is the middle stage-the middle reel is the middle stage-the right reel is the middle stage).

FIG. 60A shows a state in which all reels are rotating. When the left eye push bell small winning combination is internally won in the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game) and the stop switch is pushed forward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044a), the main control means 1100 Since the first stop operation is in the correct pressing order, the watermelon symbol is stopped on the effective line and the bell symbol is displayed in the lower row (see FIG. 60 (B)). In this state, small wins other than FRU30 cannot be won, and FRU31 and one small win A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the middle-sized check symbol on the effective line and displays the bell symbol in the lower row (see FIG. 60 (C)). When the stop switch 1044c is operated in the third stop operation, the lower pie symbol (may be a bardo check symbol) is stopped on the effective line, the bell symbol is displayed in the lower row, and the FRU30 is awarded (FIG. 60 (FIG. 60). See D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the correct push order, the FRU30, which is a strong bell, is sure to win a prize.

FIG. 61A shows a state in which all reels are rotating. When the left-eye push bell small winning combination is internally won in the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game) and the stop switch is middle-pressed (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044b), the main control means 1100 Since the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order and the operation timing is one frame above (the bell symbol is one frame above the lower bita position), the bell symbol is stopped on the effective line and the bell symbol is displayed in the middle row. (See FIG. 61 (B)). In this state, small wins other than FRU31 cannot be won, and FRU30 and one small win A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044c is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the bell symbol on the effective line and displays the bell symbol in the middle stage (see FIG. 61 (C)). When the stop switch 1044a is operated in the third stop operation, the bell symbol is stopped on the effective line, the bell symbol is displayed in the middle row, and the FRU 31 is awarded (see FIG. 61 (D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order (middle first or right first) and the operation timing is one or more frames (1 to 4 frames) from the lower position in the first stop, it is a normal bell role. Make sure to win the FRU31.

FIG. 62A shows a state in which all reels are rotating. When the left eye push bell small winning combination is internally won in the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game) and the stop switch is pushed backward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c), the main control means 1100 , The first stop operation is in the wrong release order, and the operation timing is one frame above (the bell symbol is one frame above the lower bita position), so the bell symbol is stopped on the effective line and the bell symbol is displayed in the middle row. (See FIG. 62 (B)). In this state, small wins other than FRU31 cannot be won, and FRU30 and one small win A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the bell symbol on the effective line and displays the bell symbol in the middle stage (see FIG. 62 (C)). When the stop switch 1044a is operated in the third stop operation, the bell symbol is stopped on the effective line, the bell symbol is displayed in the middle row, and the FRU 31 is awarded (see FIG. 62 (D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order (middle first or right first) and the operation timing is one or more frames (1 to 4 frames) from the lower position in the first stop, it is a normal bell role. Make sure to win the FRU31.

FIG. 63 (A) shows a state in which all reels are rotating. When the left eye push bell small winning combination is internally won in the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game) and the stop switch is pushed backward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c), the main control means 1100 , The first stop operation is in the wrong release order, but the operation timing is the position of 0 frame slip (the bell symbol is the lower bita position), so the lower pie symbol is stopped on the effective line and the bell symbol is displayed in the lower row. (See FIG. 63 (B)). In this state, small wins other than FRU30 cannot be won, and FRU31 and one small win A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the middle-sized check symbol on the effective line and displays the bell symbol in the lower row (see FIG. 63 (C)). When the stop switch 1044a is operated in the third stop operation, the watermelon symbol is stopped on the effective line, the bell symbol is displayed in the lower row, and the FRU30 is awarded (see FIG. 62 (D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the wrong pressing order (middle first or right first) and the operation timing is the position where the operation timing is 0 frame slip (bita position) at the first stop, the FRU30 which is a strong bell role is always won. Let me. Regardless of whether or not the small bell for pushing the button is won, the player can always aim and operate the big pie symbol shown in FIG. 63 (A) as a DDT point. Similarly, if the middle-pressing bell small combination or the right-eye pressing bell small combination is internally won and the correct answer pressing order is used, the strong bell role FRU30 is always won, while if the incorrect answering order is used, the operation timing is changed. The normal bell role wins at the position of one or more frames, and the strong bell role wins at the position where the operation timing is 0 frames.

As an embodiment, (1) the main control means 1100 wins the left, middle, or right push bell small combination to the sub control means 1200 when any one of the three push bell small wins is won. Send the winning combination information indicating that. However, the sub-control means 1200 can prevent the speaker 1036 and the image display device 1034 from producing any effect even if the winning combination information is received. In that case, since it is necessary for the player to always aim and operate the big pie symbol shown in FIG. 63 (A) as a DDT point, the burden becomes too large. (2) Upon receiving the winning combination information, the sub-control means 1200 can generate a voice "chance" from the speaker 1036 or display "chance time" on the image display device 1034. In that case, the player only has to aim and operate the big pie symbol shown in FIG. 63 (A) as the DDT point only at the time of the chance time, so that the burden is considerably reduced. (3) In addition to (2), the sub-control means 1200 issues a quiz for deriving the correct answer operation procedure, displays "the height of the main character A" on the image display device 1034, and further displays directly above the reel. Three frames are formed on the screen, and characters such as "165 cm" are displayed on the left frame of the screen, "164 cm" is displayed on the middle frame of the screen, and "166 cm" is displayed on the left frame of the screen. Player X, who is familiar with the main character A, knows that the correct answer is 165 cm, so he operates the left stop button without hesitation, so there is no need to press the eyes and the burden is eliminated. In addition, "Food that enemy character B dislikes" is displayed on the image display device 1034, three frames are formed on the display screen above the reel, "natto" is on the left frame of the screen, and the middle frame of the screen. "Dried Kusaya" is displayed on the screen, and "Durian" is displayed on the right frame of the screen. Player X, who is very familiar with enemy character B, knows that the correct answer is natto, so he operates the left stop button without hesitation, but ignorant player Y searches the Internet and the correct answer is natto. Yes, the left reel may be stopped first, but even if you do not know it, you can aim and operate the big pie symbol as a DDT point by pressing the bitter, so it is expected that you will operate the right stop button regardless of the quiz.

Application Example 4-1 (Modification Example 4-1):
As an example in which neither FRU30 nor FRU31 wins a prize, the push bell small winning combination is a small winning combination in which at least FRU30 and FRU31 win at the same time. Further, one small winning combination for stop control is won, and one small winning combination wins or is missed. That is, in this example, FRU30 may win a prize, FRU31 may win a prize, one small winning combination may win a prize, or all the small winning combinations may not win a prize.

FRU30 is usually a bell, and the combination of symbols is that the left drum is a bell symbol, the middle drum is a bell symbol and the right drum is a bell symbol, and when a prize is won, the bell symbol is displayed on the center horizontal line and there are 9 payouts. .. FRU31 is a strong bell, and the combination of symbols is that the left drum is a watermelon symbol, the middle drum is a bardo chef symbol, and the right drum is a bardo chef symbol or a lower pie symbol. It is displayed and there are 9 payouts. While the normal bell is usually a small role, the strong bell is treated as a rare small role, so it is easy to shift to pseudo bonuses and special games. That is, when the small winning bell is won, it is more advantageous to display the strong bell than to display the normal bell. Etc. are performed, and the number of continuous games and the transition to pseudo-bonus and special games are increased, so that the ball ejection performance (the ejection rate) is increased.

There are three types of small bells for pushing the eyes, a small bell for pushing the left eye, a small bell for pushing the middle eye, and a small bell for pushing the right eye. For example, FRU30 and FRU31 and one small winning combination A win the left-handed bell small winning combination at the same time. FRU30 and FRU31 and one small winning combination B for pushing order control are simultaneously elected as the bell small winning combination for middle-sized pushing. FRU30 and FRU31 and one small winning combination C for pushing order control are simultaneously elected as the right-eye pushing bell small winning combination. For example, in the symbol of one small role A, the left drum is a bullet bra symbol or a middle-sized chef symbol, the middle drum is a replay symbol, and the right drum is a replay symbol. be.

When the left-eye pushing bell small winning combination is won, the main control means 1100 transmits the winning combination information indicating that the left-eye pushing bell small winning combination has been won to the sub-control means 1200. Upon receiving the winning combination information, the sub-control means 1200 generates a "chance" and a voice from the speaker 1036, and displays the "chance time" on the image display device 1034. Further, the sub control means 1200 turns on the chance LED (not shown). Here, the sub-control means 1200 displays a quiz for deriving the correct answer pressing order on the image display device 1034. Specifically, as a quiz, "The height of the main character A" is displayed on the image display device 1034, three frames are displayed on the screen above the reel, "165 cm" is displayed on the left frame of the screen, and the inside of the screen. The characters "164 cm" are displayed in the frame and "166 cm" is displayed in the right frame of the screen. Player X, who is familiar with the main character A, knows that the correct answer is 165 cm, so he operates the left stop button without hesitation. It may be stopped at, but even if you do not know it, the answer is correct with a probability of 1/3, so operate the stop button appropriately or press the bita aiming at the DDT point.

In the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game), when the left eye push bell small winning combination is internally won and the stop switch is pushed forward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044a), as shown in FIG. 60. Since it is the same, the explanation is used. That is, if the first stop operation is in the correct push order, the FRU30, which is a strong bell, is sure to win a prize (see FIG. 60).

In the normal game state (game state other than the 1st type BB game), the left eye push bell small winning combination is internally won, the stop switch is middle-pressed (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044b), and the operation timing is one frame higher. In this case, since it is the same as in FIG. 61, the description is incorporated. That is, if the first stop operation is in the order of incorrect release and the operation timing is one frame higher, the FRU 31 which is a normal bell role is always won a prize (see FIG. 61).

64 to 65 are schematic views showing the symbol display state of the window portion 3 for displaying the symbols of the three reels 2 in chronological order. The effective line is the above-mentioned center horizontal line (the left reel is the middle stage-the middle reel is the middle stage-the right reel is the middle stage).

FIG. 64 (A) shows a state in which all reels are rotating. In the normal game state (game state other than the 1st class BB game), the small winning combination of the left eye push bell is internally won, the stop switch is middle-pressed (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044b), and the operation timing is two frames higher (1st stop operation). When the number of shift frames is 2 to 4 frames), in the main control means 1100, the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order, and the operation timing is higher than 2 frames (the bell symbol is 2 frames from the lower bita position). Since (above), the replay symbol with a small payout but a large number of symbol combinations is stopped on the effective line, and the replay symbol is displayed in the middle row (see FIG. 64 (B)). In this state, since the small winning combination other than the one small winning combination A cannot be won, the FRU30 and FRU31 cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the replay symbol on the effective line and displays the replay symbol in the middle stage (see FIG. 64 (C)). When the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the bullet bra symbol or the middle-sized check symbol can be pulled in by the third stop operation, the middle-sized check symbol (or the bullet-shaped bra symbol) is stopped on the effective line, and the middle-sized check symbol is stopped. Is displayed in the middle row, and one small winning combination A is won (see FIG. 64 (D)). On the other hand, if the stop switch 1044a is operated at a timing in which both the bullet bra symbol and the bardo check symbol cannot be pulled in by the third stop operation, a lost eye is displayed and none of the small wins is won. That is, if the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order (middle first or right first), and the operation timing is two or more frames (2 to 4 frames) from the lower position in the first stop, the obstruction small role 1 Make the small winning combination A win or drop it.

In the normal game state (game state other than the 1st class BB game), the small winning bell for pushing the left eye is internally won, the stop switch is pushed backward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c), and the operation timing is one frame higher. In the case of, since it is the same as in FIG. 62, the explanation is incorporated. That is, if the first stop operation is in the order of incorrect release and the operation timing is one frame higher, the FRU 31 which is a normal bell role is always won a prize (see FIG. 62).

In the normal game state (game state other than the 1st class BB game), the left eye push bell small winning combination is internally won, the stop switch is pushed backward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c), and the operation timing is bitter push. In the case (also referred to as the case where the number of shifted frames is 0 or the operation timing is the shifted amount of the predetermined number of frames or less), the same as in FIG. 63, so the description is incorporated. That is, if the first stop operation is in the order of incorrect release and the operation timing is 0 frames (bita position), the FRU30, which is a strong bell, is sure to win a prize (see FIG. 63).

FIG. 65 (A) shows a state in which all reels are rotating. In the normal game state (game state other than the 1st class BB game), the small winning combination of the left eye push bell is internally won, the stop switch is pushed backward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c), and the operation timing is two frames higher. In the case of (2 frames to 4 frames), in the main control means 1100, the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order, and the operation timing is higher than 2 frames (the bell symbol is 2 frames higher than the lower bita position). Therefore, the replay symbol with a small payout but a large number of combinations of symbols is stopped on the effective line, and the replay symbol is displayed in the middle row (see FIG. 65 (B)). In this state, since the small winning combination other than the one small winning combination A cannot be won, the FRU30 and FRU31 cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the replay symbol on the effective line and displays the replay symbol in the middle stage (see FIG. 65 (C)). When the stop switch 1044a is operated at the timing when the bullet bra symbol or the middle-sized check symbol can be pulled in by the third stop operation, the bullet bra symbol (or the middle-sized check symbol) is stopped on the effective line and the bullet bra symbol is stopped. Is displayed in the middle row, and one small winning combination A is won (see FIG. 64 (D)). On the other hand, if the stop switch 1044a is operated at a timing in which both the bullet bra symbol and the bardo check symbol cannot be pulled in by the third stop operation, a lost eye is displayed and none of the small wins is won. That is, if the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order (middle first or right first), and the operation timing is two or more frames (2 to 4 frames) from the lower position in the first stop, the obstruction small role 1 Make the small winning combination A win or drop it.

Application Example 4-2 (Modification Example 4-2, Pushing order replaying role for pushing):
RPLY30 is a normal replay, and as for the combination of symbols, the left drum is the replay symbol, the middle drum is the replay symbol, and the right drum is the replay symbol. , The re-game combination is activated, and the next game can be performed again without throwing in the game medium. RPLY31 is a strong replay, and the combination of symbols is as follows: left drum is upper pie symbol / location bra symbol / bullet bra symbol, middle drum is middle pie symbol and right drum is upper pie symbol / seven symbol / bullet bra symbol / middle none. It is a Choi symbol, and when a prize is won (the symbol is displayed), the replay symbol is displayed on the upper horizontal line, the re-game combination is activated, and the next game can be performed again without inserting the game medium. While normal replay is a normal replay role, strong replay is treated as a rare replay role, so it is easy to shift to pseudo bonuses and special games. That is, when the push order replay combination for pushing is won, it is more advantageous to display the strong replay than to display the normal replay, and the assist function activation lottery and the additional lottery are performed. Since the number of continuous games and the transition to pseudo-bonus and special games will increase, the ball ejection performance (output rate) will increase.

There are three types of push-order re-games for pushing the eyes, which are the push-order re-game for the left-eye push, the push-order re-game for the middle-eye push, and the push-order re-game for the right-eye push. For example, in the push order replay combination for pushing the left eye, RPLY30 and RPLY31 and another replay combination (control replay combination A) are simultaneously elected (however, only RPLY30 and RPLY31 may be elected). RPLY30 and RPLY31 and the control replaying combination B for pushing order control are simultaneously elected as the push order replaying combination for pushing the middle eye. As the push order replay combination for pushing the right eye, RPLY30 and RPLY31 and the control replay combination C for push order control are simultaneously elected.

When the left-eye push-order re-game combination is won, the main control means 1100 transmits the winning combination information indicating that the left-eye push push order re-game combination has been won to the sub-control means 1200. Upon receiving this winning combination information, the sub-control means 1200 generates a voice "chance replay" from the speaker 1036, and displays "chance replay time" on the image display device 1034. Further, the sub control means 1200 lights and blinks the chance LED (not shown) in blue. Here, the sub-control means 1200 displays a quiz for deriving the correct answer pressing order on the image display device 1034. Specifically, as a quiz, "What is the height of the main character B?" Is displayed on the image display device 1034, three frames are displayed on the screen above the reel, and "185 cm" is displayed on the left frame of the screen. The characters "184 cm" are displayed in the middle frame and "186 cm" is displayed in the right frame of the screen. Player X, who is familiar with the main character B, knows that the correct answer is 185 cm, so he operates the left stop button without hesitation. It may be stopped at, but even if you do not know it, the answer is correct with a probability of 1/3, so operate the stop button appropriately or press the bita aiming at the DDT point.

66 to 69 are schematic views showing the symbol display state of the window portion 3 for displaying the symbols of the three reels 2 in chronological order. The effective line is the above-mentioned center horizontal line (the left reel is the middle stage-the middle reel is the middle stage-the right reel is the middle stage).

FIG. 66A shows a state in which all reels are rotating. In the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game), when the left eye push push order replay combination is internally won and the stop switch is forward push operation (first stop operation of the stop switch 1044a), the main control means. In 1100, since the first stop operation is in the correct push order, the bullet bra symbol is stopped on the effective line and the replay symbol is displayed in the upper row (see FIG. 66 (B)). In this state, the replaying combination other than RPLY31 cannot be won, and the RPLY30 and the control replaying combination A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the middle-sized check symbol on the effective line and displays the replay symbol in the upper row (see FIG. 66 (C)). When the stop switch 1044c is operated in the third stop operation, the bullet bra symbol (which may be the upper pie symbol / seven symbol / middle-less che symbol) is stopped on the effective line, the replay symbol is displayed in the upper row, and RPLY31. (See FIG. 66 (D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the correct push order, the RPLY31, which is a strong replay combination, is sure to win a prize.

FIG. 67A shows a state in which all reels are rotating. In the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game), when the left eye push push order re-game combination is internally elected and the stop switch is middle-pressed (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044b), the main control means 1100 Since the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order and the operation timing is one frame above (the replay symbol is one frame above the upper bita position), the replay symbol is stopped on the effective line and the replay symbol is moved to the middle row. Display (see FIG. 67 (B)). In this state, the replaying combination other than RPLY30 cannot be won, and the RPLY31 and the control replaying combination A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044a is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the replay symbol on the effective line and displays the replay symbol in the middle stage (see FIG. 67 (C)). When the stop switch 1044c is operated in the third stop operation, the replay symbol is stopped on the effective line, the replay symbol is displayed in the middle row, and the RPLY 30 is awarded (see FIG. 67 (D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order (middle first or right first) and the operation timing is one or more frames (1 to 4 frames) from the upper position in the first stop, the normal replay role is used. Make sure to win a certain RPLY30.

FIG. 68A shows a state in which all reels are rotating. In the normal game state (game state other than the 1st type BB game), when the left eye push push order re-game combination is internally elected and the stop switch is pushed backward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c), the main control means In 1100, the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order, and the operation timing is one frame above (the replay symbol is one frame above the upper bita position), so the replay symbol is stopped on the effective line and the replay symbol is placed in the middle row. (See FIG. 68 (B)). In this state, the replaying combination other than RPLY30 cannot be won, and the RPLY31 and the control replaying combination A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the replay symbol on the effective line and displays the replay symbol in the middle stage (see FIG. 68 (C)). When the stop switch 1044a is operated in the third stop operation, the replay symbol is stopped on the effective line, the replay symbol is displayed in the middle row, and the RPLY 30 is awarded (see FIG. 68 (D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order (middle first or right first) and the operation timing is one or more frames (1 to 4 frames) from the upper position in the first stop, the normal replay role is used. Make sure to win a certain RPLY30.

FIG. 69A shows a state in which all reels are rotating. In the normal game state (game state other than the type 1 BB game), when the left eye push push order re-game combination is internally elected and the stop switch is pushed backward (the first stop operation of the stop switch 1044c), the main control means In 1100, the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order, but the operation timing is the position where the replay symbol slides 0 frames (the replay symbol is the upper bita position), so the upper pie symbol is stopped on the effective line and the replay symbol is placed in the upper row. (See FIG. 69 (B)). In this state, the replaying combination other than RPLY31 cannot be won, and the RPLY30 and the control replaying combination A cannot be won.

When the stop switch 1044b is operated in the second stop operation, the main control means 1100 stops the middle-sized check symbol on the effective line and displays the replay symbol in the upper row (see FIG. 69 (C)). When the stop switch 1044a is operated in the third stop operation, the upper pie symbol is stopped on the effective line, the replay symbol is displayed in the upper row, and the RPLY31 is awarded (see FIG. 69 (D)). That is, if the first stop operation is in the incorrect release order (middle first or right first) and the operation timing is the position where the operation timing is 0 frame slip (bita position) at the first stop, the strong replay role RPLY31 is always won. Let me. Regardless of whether or not the push order replaying combination for pushing the left eye is won, the player can always aim and operate the big pie symbol shown in FIG. 69 (A) as a DDT point. Similarly, if the middle-press push order re-game combination or the right-eye push push order re-game combination is internally won and the correct answer push order is used, the strong replay combination RPLY31 always wins a prize, while the incorrect answer push order is used. , The normal replay combination wins at the position where the operation timing is 1 frame or more, and the strong replay combination wins at the position where the operation timing slides 0 frames.

As an embodiment, (1) the main control means 1100 receives a left, middle, or right push order re-game for the sub-control means 1200 when any of the three push order re-games for the push is won. Send the winning combination information indicating that the combination has been won. However, the sub-control means 1200 can prevent the speaker 1036 and the image display device 1034 from producing any effect even if the winning combination information is received. In that case, since it is necessary for the player to always aim and operate the big pie symbol shown in FIG. 69 (A) as a DDT point, the burden becomes too large. (2) When the sub-control means 1200 receives the winning combination information, the sub-control means 1200 can generate a sound of "chance replay" from the speaker 1036 or display "chance replay time" on the image display device 1034. In that case, the player only has to aim and operate the big pie symbol shown in FIG. 69 (A) as a DDT point only at the time of chance time, so that the burden is considerably reduced. (3) In addition to (2), the sub-control means 1200 issues a quiz for deriving the correct answer operation procedure, displays "the height of the main character A" on the image display device 1034, and further displays directly above the reel. Three frames are formed on the screen, and characters such as "165 cm" are displayed on the left frame of the screen, "164 cm" is displayed on the middle frame of the screen, and "166 cm" is displayed on the left frame of the screen. Player X, who is familiar with the main character A, knows that the correct answer is 165 cm, so he operates the left stop button without hesitation, so there is no need to press the eyes and the burden is eliminated. In addition, "Food that enemy character B dislikes" is displayed on the image display device 1034, three frames are formed on the display screen above the reel, "natto" is on the left frame of the screen, and the middle frame of the screen. "Dried Kusaya" is displayed on the screen, and "Durian" is displayed on the right frame of the screen. Player X, who is very familiar with enemy character B, knows that the correct answer is natto, so he operates the left stop button without hesitation, but ignorant player Y searches the Internet and the correct answer is natto. Yes, the left reel may be stopped first, but even if you do not know it, you can aim and operate the big pie symbol as a DDT point by pressing the bitter, so it is expected that you will operate the right stop button regardless of the quiz.

1010 slot machine (game machine)
1034 image display device (display means)
1040a Lower panel 1040b Setting mode display 1054 Settlement button (operation means)
1300 Directing means 1034 Image display device (directing means, display means)
1036 speaker (directing means, audio output means)
1038 lamp (directing means)
1200 sub control means (effect control means)
2000 Mobile phone communication system 2100 Mobile phone (information medium)
2102 CPU (conversion means)
2124 Antenna (communication means)
2126 Communication I / F (communication means)
2128 Image sensor (imaging means)
2300 Packet network 3000 Server system 3100 Gaming machine server (external processing means)
3152 CPU (information generation means for game execution)
3154 ROM (information generation means for game execution)
3156 RAM (information generation means for game execution)
3162 External connection I / F (communication means)
3200 network

Claims (1)

Multiple cylinders with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer peripheral surface,
A role lottery method for determining the success or failure of a role by drawing a role for each game,
A plurality of rotating cylinders are rotated for each game, and when the operation of the stop switch provided corresponding to each rotating cylinder is received, the corresponding rotating cylinders are individually stopped to play a determined role. A symbol display control means for displaying a symbol in a corresponding manner, and
Equipped with
Among the combinations determined by the combination lottery means, there are a plurality of combinations for pressing, and at least the first combination and the second combination are simultaneously elected as the combination for pressing, and the first combination is selected. The first payout rate when the winning combination is won and the second payout rate when the second winning combination is won are higher than the first payout rate. Is set to
The correct answer operation order for winning the second winning combination is defined for the plurality of pressing combinations.
A gaming machine featuring.

Images